Siemens Sra4 SDH Split Radio - For Set

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY
User Manual
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU)
SDH Split Radio
UMN
911-381/02C0000
Issue 7, March 2006
Copyright (C) Siemens S.p.A. 2006

V.le Piero e Alberto Pirelli, 10
I-20126 Milano
Issued by Customer Documentation Department
S.S. 11 Padana Superiore, km 158
I-20060 Cassina de Pecchi MI
DISCLAIMER
Siemens may have patents, patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights relevant to the subject matters
present in this document.
If not explicitly defined by a license agreement written by Siemens, the ownership of this document does not give any use license for the
above mentioned patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual properties.
For your convenience, Siemens may make this document available.
The entire risk deriving from the use, or the results of the use, of this document are at users charge.
The information contained in this document is subjected to changes without notice.
Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as they are specifically and expressly agreed previously in a written contract.
Siemens gives no assurance relevant to the accuracy of the results or of the output deriving from such information.
In case of utilization of the information transferred by means of this document, we advise You to verify if the export licenses, required by the
laws, have been granted or if there are not any other impediments arising from the laws in course in Italy, Germany or relevant to the export.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
STATUS OF MANUAL

STATUS OF MANUAL
Current:
Issue 7, March 2006
Previous:
Issue 6, January 2006
In Issue 7, March 2006, as to the previous Issue 6, January 2006:
The SRA4 IDU-STM1 has been added;
the 11 GHz ODU extension P/N have been updated;
the Optical Safety has been modified.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
R-1
STATUS OF MANUAL
LA
PA
G
E

R-2
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
INDEX
INDEX
STATUS OF MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R.1
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.1
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.7
LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.11
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1

1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Object of the present manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Contents of the user manual (UMN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.1.1
1.2.1.1.1
1.2.1.2
1.2.1.3
1.2.1.4
1.2.2
SAFETY RULES AND USE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2

Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Optical safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Warnings for the optical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Waste equipment management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
External operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
ESDS precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
1.3
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
PLANNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.5.1
2.1.5.1.1
2.1.5.1.2
2.1.5.1.3
2.1.5.2
2.1.5.2.1
2.1.5.2.2
2.1.6
2.1.6.1
2.1.6.2
2.1.6.3
2.1.7
2.1.7.1
2.1.7.1.1
2.1.7.1.2
2.1.7.1.3
2.1.7.2
2.1.7.2.1
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1

RF channeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
System types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Modulation type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
System building blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Indoor section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
1+0/2+0/1+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
2x(1+1) configuration (SRA4 IDU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
Outdoor section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
AP ODU (Transceiver for AP channelling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
AP/CC ODU (Transceiver for AP or CC channelling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
IDU-ODU interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
Radio signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
IDU/ODU service auxiliary channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
ODU power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
System protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
1+1 protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
Switching criteria in the Tx Switch (Trib. Switch). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
Switching criteria in the Rx Switch (Dem. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
Switching criteria in the ODU Hot Stand-by Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
N+1 protection (with SRA4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
NE Controller behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
I-1
INDEX

2.1.7.2.2 BB Card Equipping and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.7.2.3 Auxiliary Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.7.2.4 RS Controller and Protection Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.8
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.9
System power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.10 Facility & services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.10.1 Equipment management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.10.1.1F interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.10.1.2Q interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.11 Mechanical structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.12 Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.24
2.24
2.24
2.31
2.31
2.33
2.34
2.35
2.35
2.36
2.36
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.1.1
2.2.1.2
2.2.1.3
2.2.1.4
2.2.1.5
2.2.1.5.1
2.2.1.6
2.2.1.7
2.2.1.8
2.2.1.9
2.2.1.10
2.2.1.11
2.2.1.12
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.7.1
2.2.7.2
2.2.7.3
2.2.7.4
2.2.7.5
2.2.7.6
2.2.7.7
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Electrical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IDU/ODU Connection Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmitter Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the Transmitter (Hot Standby version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiver Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modemodulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Service Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Baseband Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1+1 protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External alarms electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Consumption (from 48 V battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop-backs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMC/EMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF Channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6L GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6U GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.37
2.37
2.37
2.39
2.40
2.40
2.41
2.41
2.41
2.42
2.42
2.42
2.43
2.43
2.43
2.44
2.45
2.45
2.46
2.46
2.47
2.47
2.48
2.49
2.52
2.55
2.56
2.57
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.3.1
2.3.3.2
2.3.3.3
2.3.3.4
2.3.4
2.3.4.1
2.3.4.1.1
2.3.4.1.2
2.3.4.1.3
2.3.4.1.4
2.3.4.1.5
EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indoor assembly composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IDU equipment as a function of the configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indoor assembly composition (IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Licence fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrading kits for on-field upgrading of the licence types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor assembly composition (ODU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ODU AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 GHz ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 GHz ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 GHz ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 GHz ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 GHz ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.58
2.59
2.70
2.71
2.74
2.77
2.86
2.86
2.87
2.87
2.87
2.88
2.89
2.90
2.91

I-2
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
INDEX

2.3.4.2
2.3.4.2.1
2.3.4.2.2
2.3.4.2.3
2.3.4.2.4
2.3.4.2.5
2.3.5
2.3.5.1
2.3.5.2
2.3.6
2.3.6.1
2.3.6.2
2.3.6.3
2.3.6.4
2.3.7
2.3.7.1
2.3.7.2
2.3.7.2.1
2.3.7.2.2
2.3.7.3
2.3.7.4
2.3.7.4.1
2.3.7.4.2
2.3.7.5
2.3.7.5.1
2.3.7.5.2
2.3.7.6
2.3.7.6.1
2.3.7.6.2
ODU AP/CC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93

ODU 6 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93
7 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.94
8 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.95
11 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.96
13 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.97
IDU/ODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99
3/10 50 ohm coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99
1/4 50 ohm coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.100
ODU coaxial connections for the CO-CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.102
2+0 CC configuration connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.102
2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.104
2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.107
2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.110
Supporting frames (AP and AP/CC ODU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.113
1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.113
1+1 Supporting frames for Hot stand-by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.115
Balanced frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.115
Unbalanced frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.116
1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.118
Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) (6U/6L, 7 and 8 GHz) 2.120
Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.120
Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) (10, 11 and 13 GHz) . 2.122
Supporting frames for Co-Channel FD configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.124
Supporting frames for (2+0) Co-Channel FD configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.124
Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna) ODU 6L/6U, 7 and 8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.125
2.3.7.6.3 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna) ODU 11 GHz and 13 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.126
2.3.7.6.4 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . 2.127
2.3.7.7 Supporting frames for Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129
2.3.7.7.1 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration - ODU 6, 7, 8, 11
and 13 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129
INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.2.1
3.1.2.2
3.1.2.3
3.1.2.4
3.1.2.5
3.1.2.6
3.1.2.7
3.1.3
3.1.3.1
3.1.4
INSTALLATION OF THE RACK ETSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1

View of the rack ETSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Drilling planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
In-line installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
Back-to-back installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
Wall installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
In-line installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame on floating floor or on wall. . . . . 3.9
Back-to-back installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame on floating floor . . . . . . 3.10
Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolts for floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Characteristics and installation procedure of the expansion bolts for walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Ground connections for the rack ETSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Composition of the fixing kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
3.2
3.2.1
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15

IDU installation in the ETSI rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
I-3
INDEX

3.2.2
3.2.2.1
3.2.2.2
3.2.2.3
3.2.3
3.2.3.1
3.2.4
3.2.4.1
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.6.1
3.2.6.2
3.2.6.3
3.2.6.4
3.2.6.5
3.2.6.6
3.2.7
3.2.7.1
3.2.7.2
3.2.7.3
3.2.7.4
3.2.7.5
3.2.7.6
3.2.7.7
3.2.7.8
3.2.7.9
ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ODU Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ODU flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1+0 FRAME INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1+0 Frame - P/N and flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1+1 frame installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1+1 Frame - Attenuation, type of flange and P/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solar shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Not integrated system (solution with flexible waveguide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1+1 HSBY system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization co-channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Not integrated system (solution with elliptical waveguide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1+1 system HSBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization co-channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static desiccator for small system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressurization with external dehydrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P/N and composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15
3.15
3.16
3.16
3.19
3.19
3.24
3.24
3.29
3.30
3.30
3.31
3.32
3.33
3.34
3.35
3.36
3.36
3.37
3.38
3.39
3.40
3.41
3.42
3.42
3.43
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
INTERNAL CONNECTIONS ( for SRA4 IDU only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2+0 CC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N+1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.49
3.49
3.51
3.54
3.57
3.60
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.1.1
3.4.1.2
3.4.1.3
3.4.1.3.1
3.4.1.3.2
3.4.1.3.3
3.4.2
3.4.2.1
3.4.2.2
3.4.2.3
3.4.2.3.1
3.4.2.3.2
3.4.3
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRA4 IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Primary supply voltage connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Base connection elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-525/21). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection elements for 1+1/2+0 system (P/N 597-525/22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection elements for upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 (P/N 597-525/33) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRA4 IDU-STM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Primary supply voltage connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External connection elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ODU connections for received field measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.61
3.61
3.61
3.62
3.68
3.68
3.69
3.69
3.73
3.73
3.74
3.79
3.79
3.80
3.81
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.4.1
3.5.4.2
IDU/ODU CONNECTION WITH BRAIDED OR 1/4 COAXIAL CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - ODU side connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pole fixing of the grounding plate kit (P/N 332-309/91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Typical fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended clamp spacing for Braided coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended clamp spacing for 1/4 coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.82
3.82
3.83
3.84
3.85
3.86
3.86

I-4
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
INDEX

3.5.5
3.5.6
3.5.7
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.87

Braided coaxial cable Andrew and Intercond sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88
1/4 coaxial cable Andrew set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.89
ACTIVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
PRESETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
System E2PROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.4.1
4.2.4.2
4.2.4.3
4.2.4.4
4.2.4.5
4.2.4.6
4.2.4.7
4.2.4.8
ACTIVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Local checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
IDU first installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Checks on equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
List of checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Control of the system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Configuration of IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Received and Transmitted Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Switching test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Background BER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Final checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Restore of the operating conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
4.3
4.3.1
LIST AND USE OF ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7

List and use of accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS AND ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8

Normal operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Alarm conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.2.1
5.1.2.2
5.1.2.3
5.1.2.3.1
5.1.2.3.2
5.1.2.3.3
5.1.2.3.4
TROUBLESHOOTIN614-041/17G AND RESTORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1

Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
ODU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
IDU-ODU cable replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
IDU unit replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
BB+MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Alarm Restitution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Fans unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.2.1
5.2.2.2
LIST OF SPARE PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7

IDU spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
ODU spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
AP ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
AP/CC ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
PROCEDURE FOR SPARE PARTS USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10

Procedure for the IDU unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Procedure for the ODU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
I-5
INDEX

6
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1

6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.3.1
6.1.3.2
6.1.3.2.1
6.1.3.3
6.1.3.4
6.1.3.5
6.1.3.6
6.1.3.7
ODU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FSK sub-unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Microwave Transceiver Front-end subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual UHF VCO subunit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Microwave Duplexer filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tx Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATPC option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1
6.1
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.4
6.4
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.4.1
6.2.4.2
6.2.4.2.1
6.2.4.2.2
IDU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7

Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
Alarm Restitution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
Fan unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
BB Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
Modem Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
Cross Polarization Interface Canceller (XPIC) (not available in the BB-Modem units P/N
612-314/64-65) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12
6.2.4.2.3 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13
6.3
LED, MONITORING POINTS, CONNECTORS AND SWITCHES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15

I-6
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Fig. 2.1
Fig. 2.2
Fig. 2.3
Fig. 2.4
Fig. 2.5
Fig. 2.6
Fig. 2.7
Fig. 2.8
Fig. 2.9
Fig. 2.10
Fig. 2.11
Fig. 2.12
Fig. 2.13
Fig. 2.14
Fig. 2.15
Fig. 2.16
Fig. 2.17
Fig. 2.18
Fig. 2.19
Fig. 2.20
Fig. 2.21
Fig. 2.22
Fig. 2.23
Fig. 2.24
Fig. 2.25
Fig. 2.26
Fig. 2.27
Fig. 2.28
Fig. 2.29
Fig. 2.30
Fig. 2.31
Fig. 2.32
Fig. 2.33
Fig. 2.34
Fig. 2.35
Fig. 2.36
Fig. 2.37
Fig. 2.38
Fig. 2.39
Fig. 2.40
Fig. 2.41
Fig. 2.42
Fig. 2.43
Fig. 2.44
Fig. 2.45
Fig. 2.46
Fig. 2.47
Fig. 2.48
Fig. 2.49
SRA 4 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6

IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
IDU in 2x(1+1) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
IDU in N+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP channelling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP/CC channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
1+1 configuration system block diagram without tributary protection ( with SRA4 IDU and SRA4
IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
1+1 configuration system block diagram with tributary protection( with SRA4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . 2.21
Physical channels used to manage switching functionality in 3+1 system type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Tx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29
N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Rx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
Battery protection block diagram (in IDU assembly). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
SOH Bytes Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33
Equipment Management Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35
Loop-back 1 (Trib.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44
Loop-back 2 (Trib. side int.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44
Loop-back 3 (Radio ext.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44
1+0 system with independent antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.60
1+1 system with Hot Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.61
2+0 system with dual polarization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62
1+1 system copolar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.63
2+0 system with dual polarization co-channel configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64
2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.65
2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration (with two antennas). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.66
2x(1+1) Hot Standby with dual polarization co-channel configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.67
N+1 (2+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.68
N+1 (3+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.69
1+0/1+1/2+0 Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.71
N+1 Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72
2x(1+1) FD CC Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73
2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73
1+0/1+1/2+0 SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.79
1+0/1+1/2+0 SRA4 IDU-STM1 systems Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.81
2x(1+1) CC SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.83
N+1 (2+1/3+1) SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.85
Outdoor assembly (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.92
Outdoor assembly (AP/CC ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.98
3/10 or 1/4 coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.101
Connection diagram between the AP/CC ODUs for CC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.102
Connection diagram between the ODUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.103
Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna) . 2.104
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.105
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna). . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.106
Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas) . 2.107
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.108
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.109

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
I-7

Fig. 2.50
Fig. 2.51
Fig. 2.52
Fig. 2.53
Fig. 2.54
Fig. 2.55
Fig. 2.56
Fig. 2.57
Fig. 2.58
Fig. 2.59
Fig. 2.60
Fig. 2.61
Fig. 2.62
Fig. 2.63
Fig. 2.64
Fig. 2.65
Fig. 2.66
Fig. 2.67
Fig. 2.68
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2
Fig. 3.3
Fig. 3.4
Fig. 3.5
Fig. 3.6
Fig. 3.7
Fig. 3.8
Fig. 3.9
Fig. 3.10
Fig. 3.11
Fig. 3.12
Fig. 3.13
Fig. 3.14
Fig. 3.15
Fig. 3.16
Fig. 3.17
Fig. 3.18
Fig. 3.19
Fig. 3.20
Fig. 3.21
Fig. 3.22
Fig. 3.23
Fig. 3.24
Fig. 3.25
Fig. 3.26
Fig. 3.27
Fig. 3.28
Fig. 3.29
Fig. 3.30
Fig. 3.31
Fig. 3.32
Fig. 3.33
Fig. 3.34
Fig. 3.35
Fig. 3.36
Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration (2x(1+1) Hot Standby) . . . . . . . . 2.110
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.111
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.112
1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.113
1+1 Balanced supporting frame for Hot Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.115
1+1 Supporting unbalanced frame for Hot Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.116
1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.118
1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Cross-polar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.119
Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.120
Supporting frames for (2+0) Co-Channel FD configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.124
Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna). . . . . . . . . . . . 2.125
Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna). . . . . . . . . . . . 2.126
Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . 2.127
Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129
View of the rack ETSI with overall dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
General dimensions for the rack ETSI operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Fixing of the lower part: floor drilling plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Fixing of the upper part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Fixing of the upper part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Drilling plane for the in-line fixing of the Rack ETSI on floating floor and on wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Drilling plane for the back-to-back fixing of the Rack ETSI on floating floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolt for floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolt for walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Ground connections of the Rack ETSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
ODU (AP) layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
ODU (AP/CC) Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
1+0 frame - Pole fixing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
1+0 frame - O-Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
1+0 frame - ODU installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
1+0 frame - installed ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
1+1 frame - Pole fixing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
1+1 frame - O-Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
1+1 frame - ODU installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27
1+1 frame - installed ODUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
Solar shield installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Connections (1+0 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30
Connections (1+1 Hot Standby system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31
Connections (2+0 system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Connections (2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Connections (1+1 Hot Standby system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39
Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40
Connections (2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41
Static desiccator for small system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42

I-8
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006

Fig. 3.37
Fig. 3.38
Fig. 3.39
Fig. 3.40
Fig. 3.41
Fig. 3.42
Fig. 3.43
Fig. 3.44
Fig. 3.45
Fig. 3.46
Fig. 3.47
Fig. 3.48
Fig. 3.49
Fig. 3.50
Fig. 3.51
Fig. 3.52
Fig. 3.53
Fig. 3.54
Fig. 3.55
Fig. 3.56
Fig. 3.57
Fig. 3.58
Fig. 3.59
Fig. 3.60
Fig. 3.61
Fig. 3.62
Fig. 3.63
Fig. 3.64
Fig. 3.65
Fig. 3.66
Fig. 3.67
Fig. 3.68
Fig. 3.69
Fig. 3.70
Fig. 4.1
Fig. 4.2
Fig. 4.3
Fig. 4.4
Fig. 4.5
Fig. 4.6
Fig. 4.7
Fig. 5.1
Fig. 5.2
Fig. 5.3
Fig. 5.4
Fig. 5.5
Fig. 5.6
Fig. 6.1
Fig. 6.2
Fig. 6.3
Fig. 6.4
Fig. 6.5
Fig. 6.6
Fig. 6.7
Fig. 6.8
Pressurization with external dehydrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42

IDU assembly with CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49
ODU AP/CC assemblies with CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.58
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs ( 2x(1+1) FD with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59
Connection between the IDU assemblies (B-link and E-link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60
Primary Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.61
Connectors not used in the N+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62
155 Mbit/s Tributary Coaxial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63
WST 2 Mbit/s Coaxial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64
Alarm Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64
LCT (RS 232) Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.66
64 kbit/s service channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.67
Connection kit for 1+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.70
Connection kit for 1+1/2+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.71
Connection kit for 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.72
Primary Power Supply Connections in IDU assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.73
155 Mbit/s Tributary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74
Alarm Connector (IDU assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.75
LCT (RS 232) Connector (IDU shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.77
64 kbit/s service channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.78
Connector for the measurement of received field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.81
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - ODU side connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.82
Grounding connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.83
Pole fixing of the grounding plate kit (P/N 332-309/91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.84
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Typical fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.85
IBraided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.87
IDU Key position (Alarm Restitution unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
ODU (AP) connection for the measurement of the received field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
ODU (AP/CC) connection for the measurement of the received field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . 4.9
LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 2x(1+1)CC system (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA4 IDU-STM1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
LEDs in N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Alarm Restitution unit replacement management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Flow chart No. 1 - Intervention procedure because of failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
ODU Disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
Outdoor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
MWTF simplified block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
IDU Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: BB Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
XPIC Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12
Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: MODEM Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
Front panel of the SRA4 IDU with electrically interfaced BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15
Front panel of the SRA4 IDU with optically interfaced BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
I-9

Fig. 6.9
Fig. 6.10
Fig. 6.11
Fig. 6.12
Fig. 6.13
Fig. 6.14
Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with electrically interfaced BB-MODEM unit. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with optically interfaced BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED CH. A ON: block diagram without tributary protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED CH. A ON: block diagram with tributary protection (with SRA4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED CH. B ON: block diagram without tributary protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED CH. B ON: block diagram with tributary protection (with SRA4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.17
6.18
6.20
6.21
6.22
6.23

I-10
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
LIST OF TABLES
LIST OF TABLES
Tab. 2.1
Tab. 2.2
Tab. 2.3
Tab. 2.4
Tab. 2.5
Tab. 2.6
Tab. 2.7
Tab. 2.8
Tab. 2.9
Tab. 2.10
Tab. 2.11
Tab. 2.12
Tab. 2.13
Tab. 2.14
Tab. 2.15
Tab. 2.16
Tab. 2.17
Tab. 2.18
Tab. 2.19
Tab. 2.20
Tab. 2.21
Tab. 2.22
Tab. 2.23
Tab. 2.24
Tab. 2.25
Tab. 2.26
Tab. 2.27
Tab. 2.28
Tab. 2.29
Tab. 2.30
Tab. 2.31
Tab. 2.32
Tab. 2.33
Tab. 2.34
Tab. 2.35
Tab. 2.36
Tab. 2.37
Tab. 2.38
Tab. 2.39
Tab. 2.40
Tab. 2.41
Tab. 2.42
Tab. 2.43
RF 6 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2

RF 7 GHz channelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
RF 8 GHz channelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
RF 10 GHz channelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Base System Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
BB-MODEM unit association in 2x(1+1) configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Switching criteria in the Tx Switch (Trib. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
Switching criteria in the Rx Switch (Dem. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
Switching criteria in the ODU Hot Stand-by Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
Section OverHead bytes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34
Short cable/Long cable setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39
Max output power (typical value and tolerance at ODU flange) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40
Max output power (guaranteed value at ODU flange) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40
RF transmitted spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40
Rx guaranteed thresholds (dBm) for 128 TCM - 4D at ETSI point C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41
Rx guaranteed thresholds (dBm) for 64 TCM - 4D at ETSI point C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41
Modulation Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41
Typical Hitless switch thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42
Maximum Power consumption (from battery 48 V) with 10% tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43
6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 MAIN (1 digit cod. 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47
6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 INTERLEAVED (1 digit cod. 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47
6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 MAIN (1 digit cod. 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48
6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 INTERLEAVED (1 digit cod. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48
7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3 (1st digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49
7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50
8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 MAIN (1st digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . 2.52
8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 INTERLEAVED
(1st digit ext. P/N = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53
8 GHz channelling according to OIRT/ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 4
(1st digit ext. P/N = 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53
8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3
(1st digit ext. P/N = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54
10 GHz channelling according to CEPT.Rec 12-05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.55
11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 Main
(1st digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56
11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 Interleaved/Annex 1
(1st digit ext. P/N = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56
11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Annex 2/CEPT 12-06 Recommends 3
(1st digit ext. P/N = 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57
13 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.497-6 Main (Interleaved)
(1 digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57
System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.59
SRA 4 equipment composition (P/N 802-300/12). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.70
System types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.74

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
I-11
LIST OF TABLES

Tab. 2.44
Tab. 2.45
Tab. 2.46
Tab. 2.47
Tab. 2.48
Tab. 2.49
Tab. 2.50
Tab. 2.51
Tab. 2.52
Tab. 2.53
Tab. 2.54
Tab. 2.55
Tab. 2.56
Tab. 2.57
Tab. 2.58
Tab. 2.59
Tab. 2.60
Tab. 2.61
Tab. 2.62
Tab. 2.63
Tab. 2.64
Tab. 2.65
Tab. 2.66
Tab. 2.67
Tab. 2.68
Tab. 2.69
Tab. 2.70
Tab. 2.71
Tab. 2.72
Tab. 2.73
Tab. 2.74
Tab. 2.75
Tab. 2.76
Tab. 2.77
Tab. 2.78
Tab. 2.79
Tab. 2.80
Tab. 2.81
Tab. 2.82
Tab. 2.83
Tab. 2.84
Tab. 2.85
Tab. 2.86
Tab. 2.87
Tab. 2.88
Tab. 2.89
Tab. 2.90
Tab. 2.91
Tab. 3.1
Tab. 3.2
Tab. 3.3
Tab. 3.4
Supported units in system types 1, 2, ... 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75

Supported units in system types 7, 8. 9 and 10 (2x(1+1) CC version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75
Supported units in system type 11 (2+1/3+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.76
1+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78
1+1/2+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78
1+0 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78
1+1/2+0 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78
Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.79
1+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.80
1+1/2+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.80
1+0 Optical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12G). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.80
1+1/2+0 Optical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.80
Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.81
2x(1+1) CC Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU V(H) Pol. and
IDU H(V) Pol.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.82
2x(1+1) CC Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU V(H) Pol. and
IDU H(V) Pol.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.82
2+1/3+1 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU Main and /12A for
IDU EXT.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.84
2+1/3+1 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12D for IDU Main and /12B for IDU EXT.) 2.84
Licence key P/Ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.86
Upgrading kit P/Ns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.86
7 GHz - ODU Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.87
10 GHz - ODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89
Andrew cable set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99
Intercond cable set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99
Andrew cable set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.100
1+1 Balanced supporting frame for Hot Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.115
1+1 Balanced supporting frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.122
Rack ETSI list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
Fixing kit for racks ETSI (333-043/81) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Fixing kit for racks ETSI for floating floors (Optional) (332-309/36) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
ODU Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16

I-12
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
LIST OF TABLES

Tab. 3.5
Tab. 3.6
Tab. 3.7
Tab. 3.8
Tab. 3.9
Tab. 3.10
Tab. 3.11
Tab. 3.12
Tab. 3.13
Tab. 3.14
Tab. 3.15
Tab. 3.16
Tab. 3.17
Tab. 3.18
Tab. 3.19
Tab. 3.20
Tab. 3.21
Tab. 3.22
Tab. 3.23
Tab. 3.24
Tab. 3.25
Tab. 3.26
Tab. 3.27
Tab. 3.28
Tab. 3.29
Tab. 3.30
Tab. 3.31
Tab. 3.32
Tab. 3.33
Tab. 3.34
Tab. 3.35
Tab. 3.36
Tab. 3.37
Tab. 3.38
Tab. 3.39
Tab. 4.1
Tab. 4.2
Tab. 5.1
Tab. 5.2
Tab. 5.3
Tab. 5.4
Tab. 5.5
Tab. 5.6
Tab. 5.7
Tab. 5.8
Tab. 5.9
Tab. 5.10
Tab. 5.11
Tab. 5.12
Tab. 6.1
1+0 frame - P/N and flanges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19

1+1 frame - Attenuation, type of flange and P/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
Elliptical waveguide (31263-XXX): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43
Connectors and accessories (31263-778SR): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43
Elliptical waveguide (31263-750): composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44
Elliptical waveguide (31263-YYY): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46
Connectors and accessories (31263-YYYSR): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46
155 Mbit/s Electrical Tributary Coaxial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63
STM-1 Optical Tributary Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63
WST 2 Mbit/s Coaxial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64
Alarms Connector (IDU assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.65
LCT (RS 232) Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.66
V.11 channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.67
G.703 channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.67
Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-525/21). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.68
Connection elements for 1+1/2+0 system (P/N 597-525/22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.69
Connection elements for upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 (P/N 597-525/33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.69
155 Mbit/s Electrical Tributary Coaxial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74
STM-1 Optical Tributary Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74
Alarms Connector (IDU assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.75
LCT (RS 232) Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.77
V.11 channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.78
G.703 channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.78
ANDREW set (a). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88
INTERCOND set (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88
Andrew set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.89
KEY alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Station accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
List of spare parts - IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
7 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
10 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
11 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
13 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
6 GHz (6L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
6 GHz (6U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
7 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
11 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
13 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Summary of the front panel LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
I-13
LIST OF TABLES
LA
PA
G
E

I-14
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
1 - PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
1 PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
1.1 FOREWORD
1.1.1
Object of the present manual

This User Manual (UMN) gives the information necessary for the installation, the
commissioning and the ordinary maintenance of the SRA 4 - STM-1 Access SDH Radio
System equipment in the RF band: 6, 7, 8, 10, 11 and 13 GHz.
1.1.2
Contents of the user manual (UMN)

The manual has been drawn up according to "Code of Practice" recommendations for
the writing out of instruction technical manuals, published under the support of U.E.R
(European Broadcast Union).
The manual consists of the following sections:
Section 1: PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

It contains the rules and precautionary measures to be adopted by the users of
electronic equipment as well as general nature information relevant to the
synchronous hierarchy.
Section 2: PLANNING MANUAL

It contains general information about the equipment, its electrical characteristics
and its use with a telecommunication network.
Section 3: INSTALLATION MANUAL

All the instructions are set down for the equipment mechanical installation,
complete of the constituting parts, and of the electrical connections to the outside.
Section 4: ACTIVATION MANUAL

The presetting to be performed on the equipment, if required, are described, its
activation and the check and recommended setting up measurements to ensure
the correct operation.
Section 5: MAINTENANCE MANUAL

It includes troubleshooting action, if required, useful to locate the faulty part using
the signalings and alarms available on the equipment front panel. It also includes
the list of the spare parts which can be delivered with the equipment and the
instructions for the faulty part replacement.
Section 6: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS

It includes the description of the equipment part operation referred to the relevant
block diagrams.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
1-1

In addition to the present User Manual (UMN) the OPERATOR MANUAL (OMN) is
available, that contains the operational guide for use of the control software developped
for the management, by local terminal, of the alarms and the presetting relevant to the
equipment, in addition to the restitution of the analogue measurements, of the
indications and configuration displayings of the radio system.
1.2 SAFETY RULES AND USE PRECAUTIONS

This paragraph contents all the safety rules and the use precautions to be followed
during operations on the equipment to avoid injuries to personnel and/or damages to the
equipment components.
1.2.1
Safety rules
The equipment complies with the 1999/5/EC European specification.
The equipment is prearranged for supplying from station batteries (-48 to -60 VDC
20%); then follow the on force specifications for low voltage supplied equipment's.
1.2.1.1
Optical safety
The EQUIPMENT contains only class 1 laser component according to IEC 60825-1.

1-2
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006

1.2.1.1.1 Warnings for the optical safety
The optical source used into the subject equipment has been classified by the
manufacturer as 1 class laser according to EN 60825-1/IEC 60825-1.
This class of laser is: "Lasers that are safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions of
operation, including the use of optical instruments for intrabeam viewing."
The following rules can be followed to increase the safety level:
1.2.1.2
Do not point to the eyes a broken fiber or an incomplete one or an optical connector
not covered.
If the optical source is not surely switched off, do not directly or for reflection stare
(particularly using lenses or by means of a microscope) at a broken fiber or at an
incomplete one or at an optical connector not covered.
Handle carefully the optical fiber. A broken optical fiber can cause damages to eyes
and skin.
Check that the optical source is switched off before execute or interrupt an optical
connection.
Do not connect a fiber to an optical output without checking that the fiber terminal
is ended.
Do not supply the optical tributary out of the sub-rack and do not change the factory
settings and adjustments.
Electrical safety
The equipment complies with the Safety Norms CEI EN 60950-1.
The equipment must be installed, started up, managed and repaired only by properly
trained personnel.
Before supplying the equipment, it is necessary to complete the wiring of the

connections to the protection ground, the insertion of all the units and/or modules
provided for the requested configuration and also the connection of all the
necessary connectors.
The connection to the protection ground must not be removed or damaged.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
1-3

1.2.1.3
Waste equipment management

The radio equipment at the end of its life can be classified as 16 02 14 equipment out
of use different from the equipment listed in 16 02 09 to 16 02 13 according to the
dangerous waste list determined in article 1 para. 4 of Government Recc. 91/689/EEC
on the dangerous waste updated in Recc. 2001/118/EC.
INFORMATION TO USER (FOR ITALIAN MARKET ONLY)

According to the art. 13 of the legislative decree, D.Lgs nr. 151 of the 25th of july
2005. "adopting directives 2002/95/CE, 2002/96/CE e 2003/108/CE, releted on the
restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment, and on disposal of electrical and electronic waste".
The crossed-out bin symbol on equipment, means that the product, at the end of its
useful life, must be disposed separately from the municipal waste. User should return it
to the municipalities collection system or to the ratailers if you buy a new equivalent
product.
Differentiated waste of old appliances will result in recycling, treatment and
environmental compatible disposal, which will help to prevent potential negative
consequences on the environment and human health and consequently the reuse of
renewable raw material
The misdemenour of the disposal will lead to financial penalties as defined in artt. 50
onwards, of the legislative decree nr. 22 of the 5th of february 1997.
The equipment does not include:
Cadmium
Mercury
Asbestos
Radioactive materials
PCB
Berillium

1-4
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006

1.2.1.4
External operations
Some other operations involving danger conditions are the ones executed outside
during the equipment installation and starting up phase.
During the execution of such operations, it is necessary to follow strictly the safety rules
listed here below:
During installation, while the antenna and/or the external supporting-frame for rod
are lifted, it is strictly forbidden to stay or to pass in the underlying area. Such an
area must be properly restricted or signalled according to the on force rules.
For the external operations to be executed on the antenna, on the frame and on
the ODU, all the necessary safety rules against accidental fallings of the operators
must be respected, according to the on force rules. For example, it is necessary to
use protection fences and belts.
During the equipment starting up phase, the operators must not be in front of the
antenna.
If one of the above mentioned safety rules is not respected, some injuries to the
personnel can be caused.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
1-5

1.2.2
ESDS precautions
The ESDS (Electro Static Discharge Sensitive) electronic devices can be partially or
permanently damaged by the static electricity that is commonly present in the operating
environment.
The main ESDS devices are:
CMOS components
Large Scale Integration components in MOS technology
SAW (Surface Acoustic Wave) components
Operational amplifiers with MOS/FET inputs
MOS/FET components and arrays
Microwave semiconductors and microcircuits at frequencies > 1 GHz

Modules containing ESDS devices are identified by following adhesive labels:
In order avoid any damage while handling the modules, the user should wear an
antistatic elastic bracelet, grounded by means a spiral cord.
Those modules that are mounted on the equipment (faulty or spare parts) shall be stores
in their original antistatic package marked by the labels above shown.

1-6
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006

1.3 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
ADC
Analog to Digital Converter
ADM
Add/Drop Multiplex
AGC
Automatic Gain Control
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
ANSI
American National Standard Institute
AP
Alternate Polarization
ASIC
Application Specific Integrate Circuit
ATDE
Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC
Automatic Transmit Power Control
AU
Administrative Unit
AUOH
Administrative Unit Overhead
AUG
Administrative Unit Group
AU-PTR
Administrative Unit Pointer
BB
Base Band
BCM
Block Coded Modulation
BER
Bit Error Ratio
BIP
Bit Interleaved Parity
B-ISDN
Broadband Integrated Services Digital Network
CC
Co-Channel
CCIR
Comit Consultatif International des Radiocomunications
CCITT
Comit Consultatif International Telgraphique et Tlphonique
CTR
Complesso Trasmettitore Ricevitore (Transceiver equipment)
DAC
Digital to Analog Converter
DCC
Data Communications Channel
DCCR
Data Communications Channel (Repeater section)
DCCM
Data Communications Channel.(Multiplexer section)
DCN
Data Communication Network
DFM
Dispersive Fade Margin
DLC
Digital Loop Carrier
DLS
Data Link Service
DRF
Dielectric Resonator Filter
DRO
Dielectric Resonator Oscillator
DSP
Digital Signal Processing
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTI
Double Tributary Interface
DXC
Digital cross-connect
ECC
Embedded Control Channel

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
1-7

EOC
Embedded Operations Channel
EOW
Engineering Order Wire
ETSI
European Telecommunication Standards Institute
FAL
Frame Alignment Loss
FDM
Frequency Division Multiplexing
FEBE
Far End Block Error
FEC
Forward Error Control
FERF
Far End Receive Failure
FIR
Finite Impulse Response filter
HCDR
High Capacity Digital Radio
HDLC
High-Level Data Link Control
HOVC
Higher Order Virtual Container
HPA
Higher order Path Adaption
HPA
High Power Amplifier
HPC
Higher order Path Connection
HPT
Higher order Path Termination
HUG
Higher order Unit Group
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
ISC
International Switching Center
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
ISO
International Organization for Standardization
ITU-R
International Telecom Union - Radio
ITU-T
International Telecom Union - Transmission
LAN
Local Area Network
LCN
Local Communication Network
LO
Local Oscillator
LOF
Loss Of Frame
LOM
Loss Of Multiframe
LOP
Loss Of Pointer
LOS
Loss Of Signal
LOVC
Lower Order Virtual Container
LPA
Lower order Path Adaption
LPC
Lower order Path Connection
LPT
Lower order Path Termination
LT
Line Terminal
LTE
Line Terminal Equipment
MAN
Metropolitan Area Network
MCF
Message Communication Function
MD
Mediation Device
MF
Mediation Function

1-8
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006

MS
Multiplex Section
MSOH
Multiplex Section Overhead
MSP
Multiplex Section Protection
MST
Multiplex Section Termination
MTS
Multiplex Timing Source
MW
Microwave
NB
Narrow Band
NE
Network Element
NEF
Network Element Function
NRZ
Non Return to Zero
OH
Overhead
OHA
Overhead Access
OL
Oscillatore Locale (Local oscillator)
OLC
Optical Loop Carrier
OLI
Optical Line Interface
OOF
Out Of Frame
PABX
Private Automatic Branch Exchange
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PI
Phisical Interface
PIOP
Parallel Input Output Port
PLL
Phase Locked Loop
POH
Path Overhead
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
RDI
Remote Defect Indication
REI
Remote Error Indication
RF
Radio Frequency
RPI
Radio Phisical Interface
RPS
Radio Protection Switching
RS
Regenerator Section
RSOH
Regenerator Section Overhead
RST
Regenerator Section Termination
RT
Ricevitore Trasmettitore (Transceiver)
SA
Section Adaptation
SC-DRO
Self Converting DRO
SCS
Switching Control Signal
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEMF
Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SMD
Surface Mounted Device
SMN
SDH Management Network

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
1-9

SMS
SDH Management Subnetwork
SOH
Section Overhead
SONET
Synchronous Optical Network
SPI
SDH Physical Interface
SPS
Synchronus protection switching
SSPA
Solid State Power Amplifier
STI
Single Tributary Interface
STM
Synchronous Transport Module
STM-N
Synchronous Transport Module (level) N
SW
Switching
TCM
Trellis Code Modulation
TMN
Telecommunications Management Network
TU
Tributary Unit
TUG
Tributary Unit Group
VC
Virtual Container
VCO
Voltage Controlled Oscillator
WB
Wide Band
WES
Weighted Evaluation Strategy
WST
Way Side Traffic

1-10
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING
2 PLANNING
2.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
SRA 4 is a Point to Point Broadband Wireless System adopting an Indoor-Outdoor
architecture at 6L GHz, 6U GHz, 7 GHz, 8 GHz, 10 GHz, 11 GHz and 13 GHz with
128 TCM - 4D or 64 TCM-4D band with SDH interfaces fitting recommended radio
channel arrangements listed in par. 2.1.1.
Ease and speed of link set-up, broadband availability and fiber quality, SRA 4 is the most
reliable and convenient solution for a wide range of applications such as:
SDH and traditional ATM transport networks;
LMDS, BWA networks;
UMTS/GSM cellular infrastructure networks.
The radio system SRA 4 has been designed to transmit the following signals:
SDH (STM-1)
The frame structure of the transmitted signal has the 155.520 Mbit/s bit rate with
128 TCM - 4D or 64 TCM-4D modulation.
With the 128 TCM-4D modulation the spacing for the 1xSTM-1 is 28 MHz.
With the 64 TCM-4D modulation the spacing for the 1xSTM-1 is 40 MHz.
The SRA 4 is available with two types of ODU:
WB ODU (Wide Band)
NB ODU (Narrow Band)

By means of the LCT the WB ODU can be frequency-shifted into a sub-band of the
RF band, while the NB ODU's are tuned to a specific RF channel and cannot be
frequency shifted by the LCT.
The WB ODU's are described in this manual.
The NB ODU's are described in the SRA 4 manual P/N 911-387/02C0000.
The WB ODU is supplied in two versions :
ODU AP for AP channelling only
ODU AP/CC for AP or CC channelling.
The SRA 4 is available with two types of IDU:
SRA4 IDU
SRA4 IDU-STM1

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-1
2 - PLANNING

2.1.1
RF channeling
Tab. 2.1, Tab. 2.2, Tab. 2.3, Tab. 2.4, Tab. 2.5 and Tab. 2.6 show the frequency bands
(according to the RF channeling) of the radio digital system SRA 4.
Tab. 2.1
Tab. 2.2
RF 6 GHz channelling
Recommendation
Co/cross-polar
adjacent
channel
spacing (MHz)
Centre gap
(MHz)
Shifter
Freq.
(MHz)
5925 - 6425
(6L)
ITU-R F.383-7
29.65
44.49
252.04
6430 - 7110
(6U)
ITU-R F.384-7
40
60
340
Centre gap
(MHz)
Shifter
Freq.
(MHz)
Frequency
bands
(MHz)
Frequency
bands
(MHz)
Recommendation
Co/cross-polar
adjacent
channel
spacing (MHz)
7110-7750
(lower)
ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3
28
84 copolar
196
7110-7750
(upper)
28
56 copolar
168
7125-7425
ITU-R F.385-6 (F0=7275)
28
depending
on channels
used
161
7425-7900
28
49 copolar
245
7425-7725
28
42 copolar
154
7425-7725
ITU-R F.385-6 (F0=7575)
28
depending
on channels
used
161
7125-7425
Custom (Finland)
28
56 copolar
168

2-2
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.3
Tab. 2.4
Tab. 2.5
Tab. 2.6
Recommendation
Co/cross-polar
adjacent
channel
spacing (MHz)
Centre gap
(MHz)
Shifter
Freq.
(MHz)
7725-8275
29.65
103.77
crosspolar
311.32
7900-8400
(8U)
OIRT/ITU-R F.386-6
Annex 4
28
70
crosspolar
266
8200-8500
ITU-R F.386-6
46.648
58.32
copolar
151.614
8200-8500
28
49
crosspolar
119
Centre gap
(MHz)
Shifter
Freq.
(MHz)
98
350
Frequency
bands
(MHz)
Frequency
bands
(MHz)
Recommendation
Co/cross-polar
adjacent
channel
spacing (MHz)
10000-10680
CEPT.Rec.12-05
28
Frequency
bands
(MHz)
Recommendation
Co/cross-polar
adjacent channel
spacing (MHz)
Centre gap
(MHz)
Shifter
Freq.
(MHz)
10700-11700
ITU-R F.387
Recommends 1
40
90
crosspolar
530
10700-11700
ITU-R F.387 Annex 1
40
130
crosspolar
530
10700-11700
ITU-R F.387 Annex 2
40
50
crosspolar
490
Frequency
bands
(MHz)
Recommendation
Co/cross-polar
adjacent channel
spacing (MHz)
Centre gap
(MHz)
Shifter
Freq.
(MHz)
12750-13750
ITU-R F.497-6
28
70
crosspolar
266

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-3
2 - PLANNING

2.1.2
System types
There are 11 base configurations, identified by a number called System Type; the
controller on the IDU configures the whole equipment according to this value.
The available base system types are listed in the following Tab. 2.7.
Tab. 2.7
Base System Types
Type
Description
Channeling
1+0 Terminal without Multiplex Section Termination (MST) (note 1)
AP
1+1 Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary

Interface)(note 1)
AP
1+1 Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary Interface)
(note 1)
AP
1+1 Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Double Tributary Interface)
(note 2)
AP
1+1 Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Double Tributary Interface)
(note 2)
AP
2+0 Terminal without MST (note 1)
2x(1+1) Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary Interface)
(note 2)
CC
2x(1+1) Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Double Tributary Interface)
(note 2)
CC
2x(1+1) Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary
Interface)(note 2)
CC
10
2x(1+1) Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Double Tributary Interface)
(note 2)
CC
11
N+1 Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary Interface)

(note 2)
AP
AP or CC
Note 1: Configuration with SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1.

Note 2: Configuration with SRA4 IDU only.
SRA 4 radio equipment is built up by:
1.
one indoor shelf (IDU, indoor unit), providing the base band;
2.
one or two outdoor equipment (ODU, outdoor unit), containing RF devices,

connected with the IDU through an IF (Intermediate Frequency) cable.
3.
one optional external EOW assembly
The configurations of the indoor shelf and the control programs of the slave cards are
different according to the selected system type and configuration.
The optional "EXTERNAL EOW" assembly, which

functionalities, is described in the relevant UMN manual
provides
the
EOW

2-4
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.1.3
Technology
System design is based on the use of the most advanced technologies and a big effort
has been made to transfer complexity from analog to digital hardware to take advantage
of customised integration (ASlCs) and to improve system reliability.
The biggest and most sophisticated ASIC designed for communication systems is the
heart of SRA 4 modem.
System design is based on a full digital concept. This approach takes extensive
advantage of the most recent technological achievements leading to VLSI circuit
solutions, the most suitable for managing digital signals.
In addition, this approach ensures a very high manufacturing quality, with an extremely
reliable performance.
2.1.4
Modulation type
The SRA 4 adopts 128 TCM-4D or 64 TCM-4D with Reed Solomon concatenated
coding modulation.
The major benefit of this modulation format is a strongly enhanced error correction
capability and bit error rate performance if compared with conventional QAM systems.
A very powerful data interleaving scatters the errors to reach an even, fiber-like error
distribution while maintaining a minimal system delay.
A powerful equaliser adapts the equalisation algorithm to the communication channel
parameters. Blind or decision aided adaptive equalisation are run with the best
performances at any channel condition.
64 or 128 TCM-4D with Reed Solomon concatenated coding, a powerful pointer
protection together with tailored interleavers, makes an excellent bearer for traffic
requiring errorless transmission media.
2.1.5
System building blocks

The engineering of the SRA 4 digital radio system is characterized by the high operating
frequency. For this reason, in order to minimize the feeder loss an indoor/outdoor split
configuration has been choosen. The indoor part consists of a rack ETSI and one IDU.
The IDU, with base band units and modem, is connected by means of single coaxial IF
cable to a very compact outdoor transceiver located close to the antenna (see Fig. 2.1).
Two types of ODU are available: AP and AP/CC.
The first type (AP) is available within the 7, 8, 10, 11 and 13 GHz bands for AP
channelling and implements waveguide-connections (RF) towards the antenna
and cable-connections (IF) towards the IDU.
The second type (AP/CC) is available within the 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11 and 13 GHz bands
for the AP or CC channelling, and implements for the AP configurations RF
waveguide-connections towards the antenna, and cable-connections (IF) towards
the IDU; connections between the two ODUs are also implemented for the CC
configurations.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-5
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.1
SRA 4 Equipment
FLEXIBLE
WAVE GUIDE
ODU SUPPORT
ODU
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON THE RACK

OF COAXIAL CABLE
IDU
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19)

2-6
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.1.5.1
Indoor section
Two versions of the IDU are available:
SRA4 IDU:
Main Capabilities:
Bit Rate: 1 or 2xSMT-1
Supported system types: 1+0 / 1+1 FD STI / 1+1 FD DTI / 1+1 HSBY STI /
1+1 HSBY DTI / 2+0 STI-DTI-CC WB/ 2x(1+1) FD STI / 2x(1+1) FD DTI /
2x(1+1) HSBY STI / 2x(1+1) HSBY DTI / N+1 STI
2 Mb/s WST
V11, G703 64 Kbits/s services
Co-Channel /X-PIC
WB and NB ODU supported
SRA4 IDU-STM1:
Main Capabilities:
Bit Rate: 1xSMT-1
Supported system types: 1+0 / 1+1 FD STI / 1+1 HSBY STI / 2+0 STI
V11, G703 64 Kbits/s services
WB ODU supported
2.1.5.1.1 1+0/2+0/1+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1)

The indoor section consists of one IDU.
The IDU consists of baseband interfaces for data and management, two BB/Modem
units, a Controller unit, an Alarm Restitution Unit and a Fan unit. A single coaxial IF cable
connecting the BB/Modem unit with a very compact outdoor transceiver located close to
the antenna.
An unprotected 1+0 system consists of one assembly equipped with only one
BB/Modem unit; a 1+1/2+0 system consists of an assembly equipped with two
BB/Modem units (refer Fig. 2.2 for SRA4 IDU and Fig. 2.3 for SRA4 IDU-STM1 ).
Each BB/Modem unit is connected to the outdoor unit through a single coaxial cable
where main signal, indoor-outdoor service data and outdoor power supply are sent
together. The indoor unit is totally independent of the RF band chosen for the outdoor
unit, making the system very flexible and easy to deploy.
The SOH bytes can be used to transmit two 64 kbit/s service channels and a 2 Mbit/s
WST.
The STM-1 interface can be either electrical or optical.
Fig. 2.6 shows the 1+0 block diagram of the SRA4 IDU.
Fig. 2.7 shows the 1+0 block diagram of the SRA4 IDU-STM1.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-7
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.2
IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA4 IDU)

1+0 CONFIGURATION
BB-MODEM 1 Unit
ALARM RESTITUTION Unit

CHACHB
Alarms
IDU PWR
Key
I
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
U
S
E
R
WST
V11 G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
ODU
ALM
STM-1 #2
Out In
CABLE
ALM
CO-CH
Exp. Port In
Out
ODU PWR
I
O
IF
PS
F
A
N
LCT
CONTROLLER Unit
1+1/2+0 CONFIGURATION
BB-MODEM 1 Unit

CHACHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
LCT
CONTROLLER Unit
F
A
N
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
ODU
ALM
Exp. Port
IF
PS
IF
PS
BB-MODEM 2 Unit

2-8
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.3
IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA4 IDU-STM1)

1+0 CONFIGURATION
BB-MODEM 1 Unit
CONTROLLER Unit
1+1/2+0 CONFIGURATION
CONTROLLER Unit
BB-MODEM 1 Unit
BB-MODEM 2 Unit

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-9
2 - PLANNING

2.1.5.1.2 2x(1+1) configuration (SRA4 IDU)
The indoor section consists of two IDUs.
Fig. 2.4 shows the 2x(1+1) system.
The 2x(1+1) system consists of two IDU subracks and of four BB/Modem units.
Fig. 2.4
IDU in 2x(1+1) configuration
ALARM RESTITUTION Unit (1)

BB-MODEM (1-1) unit see Tab. 2.8
CONTROLLER
Unit (1)
CHA CHB
U
n.
IDU
Alarms
Key
Q-lan E-Link
F
A
N
LCT
(1)
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U
n.
IDU
Alarms
Key
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
F
A
N
(2)
ALARM
RESTITUTION
Unit (2)
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11 G703
S
E
R
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
CO-CH ODU PWR

I
O
IF
PS
CO-CH ODU PWR

I
O
CABLE
ALM
IF
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
PS
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
IF
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
IDU Pol. V(H)
PS
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
BB-MODEM (2-2) unit see Tab. 2.8
BB-MODEM
(1-2) unit
see Tab. 2.8
BB-MODEM
(2-1) unit
see Tab. 2.8
IF
PS
IDU Pol.H(V)
CONTROLLER Unit (2)
Tab. 2.8
BB-MODEM unit association in 2x(1+1) configurations

Configuration
BB-Modem
(1-1)
BB-Modem
(1-2)
BB-Modem
(2-1)
BB-Modem
(2-2)
2x(1+1)FD
CH1
V(H)-pol
CH2
V(H)-pol
CH1
H(V)-pol
CH2
H(V)-pol
2x(1+1) HotStby
Main
V(H)-pol
Stby
V(H)-pol
Main
H(V)-pol
Stby
H(V)-pol

2-10
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.1.5.1.3 N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU)
The indoor section consists of two IDUs.
Fig. 2.5 shows a 2+1 and 3+1 protected system.
System 2+1 consists of two IDU subracks and of three BB/Modem units. The 3+1
system consists of two IDU subracks and of four BB/Modem units.
Fig. 2.5
IDU in N+1 configuration

2+1 CONFIGURATION
BB-MODEM STBY Unit
CHACHB
Alarms
CONTROLLER
Unit (1)
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
(1)
ALARM
RESTITUTION
Unit (2)
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
CHACHB
U V11 G703
S
E
R
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU PWR
Key
I
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
STM-1 #2
Out In
U
S
E
R
WST
V11 G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
IDU MAIN
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
ODU
ALM
ODU
ALM
STM-1 #2
Out In
PS
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
CABLE
ALM
CO-CH
Exp. Port In
Out
IF
IF
PS
ODU PWR
I
O
IF
PS
BBMODEM
F1 unit
BBMODEM
F2 unit
F
A
N
(2)
LCT
CONTROLLER Unit (2)
IDU EXT
3+1 CONFIGURATION
BB-MODEM STBY Unit
CHACHB
Alarms
CONTROLLER
Unit (1)
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
(1)
ALARM
RESTITUTION
Unit (2)
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
LCT
F
A
N
(2)
CONTROLLER Unit (2)
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
IDU MAIN
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
PS
ODU PWR
ODU CABLE CO-CH
O
ALM In Out I
ALM
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
IF
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
IF
PS
IF
PS
ODU PWR
ODU CABLE CO-CH
O
ALM In Out I
ALM
Exp. Port
D
IF
PS
BBMODEM
F1 unit
BBMODEM
F2 unit
BBMODEM
F3 unit
IDU EXT

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-11
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.6
2 Mbit/s Wayside
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA4 IDU)
WS Interface
BB/MODEM UNIT
WS processing
From the second
BB/MODEM unit
Data Interface
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
A1
L-RSOH
Switch A
Modulator
A2
DCC
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
DCC
DCC, S23
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Switch B
L-RSOH
Demodulator
B2
From the second
BB/MODEM unit
Data Interface
2 Mbit/s Wayside
B1
ODU
WS Interface
DCC
Power supply
WS processing
DCC
F Interface
E2 EPROM Key
Q Interface
Alarms input/output
LED
CONTROLLER
UNIT
E2 EPROM
Flash RAM

2-12
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.7
Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA4 IDU-STM1)
BB/MODEM UNIT
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
From the second

BB/MODEM unit
Data Interface
1xSTM-1
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
A1
L-RSOH
Switch A
Modulator
A2
DCC
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
DCC
DCC, S23
1xSTM-1
SDH Interface
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
T-RSOH
Switch B
L-RSOH
B1
ODU
Demodulator
B2
From the second
BB/MODEM unit
Data Interface
Power supply
DCC
DCC
F Interface
E2 EPROM Key
Q Interface
Alarms input/output
CONTROLLER
UNIT
LED
2.1.5.2
E2 EPROM
Flash RAM
Outdoor section
2.1.5.2.1 AP ODU (Transceiver for AP channelling)

Reference to the block diagram of Fig. 2.8.
The conventional block lay-out of the transceiver exploits a high degree of circuit and
function integration. Also for this part of the system high level technological solutions
have been adopted to reach the system objectives.
Being the outdoor transceiver connected to the internal terminating unit by means of a
single coaxial cable, it is necessary to have an overvoltage protection circuit and an IF
diplexer in order to separate the Tx and Rx modulated carriers.
The in/out connecting cable is also used for the supply of battery D. C. voltage(-48V) to
the transceiver and for the transmission of service subcarriers for message
communication (alarms, received field, etc.) between the indoor and outdoor units.
The ODU unit is equipped by the following subunits:

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-13
2 - PLANNING
Power supply unit:

Converts the DC voltage to the voltages required by other subunits, provides alarm
for failures, extracts the DC voltage from the cable and ensures the primary
lightning protection;
IF unit:
is a transversal subunit; it includes IF duplexer, dual IF processing, dual PLL circuit,
IDU/ODU communication channel, ODU hardware controller. Here a triplexer
addresses the IF and FSK signals respectively to the IF sections and the FSK
subcarriers toward the modem. The Tx IF (350 MHz) is up-converted to 1690 MHz,
filtered and sent to the transmitter; the Rx IF, coming from the microwave receiver
(2180 MHz), is down-converter to 140 MHz and sent to the IDU. The IF unit houses
also the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuit, a frequency reference oscillator.
Microwave Transceiver Front-End (MWTF):

designed to cover the complete RF band; it includes the microwave transmitter,
receiver and VCOs.
Dual UHF VCO:

is a part of the synthesizer used to synchronize the RF VCOs. It is mounted on the
mechanical absorber in order to avoid short-term frequency skips.
Filter duplexer:
ensures the tunability in a quarter of the RF band.
Each transceiver is installed in a waterproof housing. The ODU housing does not need
to be open, requiring simple and easy operations during installation/maintenance and
test phases.
Fig. 2.8
Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP channelling)
350 MHz
Power Supply
140 MHz
Overvoltage
protection
DUAL
VCO
DIPLEXER
Cable 50 ohm
IF
unit
MWTF
IF

2-14
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.1.5.2.2 AP/CC ODU (Transceiver for AP or CC channelling)
Reference to the block diagram of Fig. 2.9.
The conventional block lay-out of the transceiver exploits a high degree of circuit and
function integration. Also for this part of the system high level technological solutions
have been adopted to reach the system objectives.
Being the outdoor transceiver connected to the internal terminating unit by means of a
single coaxial cable, it is necessary to have an overvoltage protection circuit and an IF
diplexer in order to separate the Tx and Rx modulated carriers.
The in/out connecting cable is also used for the supply of battery D. C. voltage(-48V) to
the transceiver and for the transmission of service subcarriers for message
communication (alarms, received field, etc.) between the indoor and outdoor units.
With CC operations the two ODU's must be synchronized in Rx.
This synchronisation is established through 2 coaxial cables situated between the two
ODU's. Two synchronisms flow on the 2 cables, i.e., the first Rx conversion (from RF
frequency to 2180 MHz) and the second Rx conversion (from 2180 MHz to 140 MHz).
In the 6 GHz ODU only one conversion (from RF to 140 MHz) is present.
With regard to CC operation, one of the two ODU's must be software-preset to Master
(generates synchronisms) and the other ODU operating as Slave (receives the
synchronisms from the ODU Master).
The ODU unit is equipped by the following subunits:
Power supply unit:

Converts the DC voltage to the voltages required by other subunits, provides alarm
for failures, extracts the DC voltage from the cable and ensures the primary
lightning protection;
IF unit:
is a transversal subunit; it includes IF duplexer, dual IF processing, dual PLL circuit,
IDU/ODU communication channel, ODU hardware controller. Here a triplexer
addresses the IF and FSK signals respectively to the IF sections and the FSK
subcarriers toward the modem. The Tx IF (350 MHz) is up-converted to 1690 MHz,
filtered and sent to the transmitter; the Rx IF, coming from the microwave receiver
(2180 MHz), is down-converted to 140 MHz and sent to the IDU. The IF unit houses
also the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuit, a frequency reference oscillator.
Microwave Transceiver Front-End (MWTF):

designed to cover the complete RF band; it includes the microwave transmitter,
receiver and VCOs.
Dual UHF VCO:

is a part of the synthesizer used to synchronize the RF VCOs. It is mounted on the
mechanical absorber in order to avoid short-term frequency skips.
Filter duplexer:
ensures the tunability in a quarter of the RF band.
Each transceiver is installed in a waterproof housing. The ODU housing does not need
to be open, requiring simple and easy operations during installation/maintenance and
test phases.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-15
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.9
Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP/CC channelling
To/from other
ODU
VCO
2nd Rx
Conversion
350 MHz
Overvoltage
protection
350 MHz
Down
Converter
2180 MHz
1690 MHz
Up
Converter
IF Unit
RF DUAL VCO
Tx
VCO
DIPLEXER
IF
Cable 50 ohm
140 MHz
Power Supply
MWTF
140 MHz
Rx
VCO
To/from other
ODU
With regard to AP operation switch 1 is closed and switches 2-3-4 are open.
With regard to CC operation switches 1-2-4 on the ODU Master are closed and
switch 3 is open. On the ODU Slave, instead, switches 1 and 2 are open and 3-4
closed.

2-16
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.1.6
IDU-ODU interconnection
The IDU-ODU interconnection takes place through a single bi-directional line, carrying
the aggregate signal (Tx/Rx radio signal, IDU/ODU auxiliary service channel and ODU
power supply).
2.1.6.1
Radio signal
The IDU-ODU connection, regarding the radio signal transmission/reception, includes
the IF signals:
350 MHz modulated signal to transmit the Tx signal (from IDU to ODU)
140 MHz modulated signal to transmit the Rx signal (from ODU to IDU).
By using frequencies 350 MHz and 140 MHz it is possible to:
2.1.6.2
optimize the length, the attenuation and the size of the connection cable IDU-ODU
minimize the filtering functions in IDU and ODU
minimize the interferences between the Tx and Rx sections of the ODU
minimize the interferences between the harmonics of the IF Tx frequency and the
shifter frequencies
obtain the dynamic interval necessary to AGC circuit in IDU and ODU.
IDU/ODU service auxiliary channel

An auxiliary channel connects IDU to ODU, carrying all the information for the correct
operation of the equipment (alarms, data channel, speech channel, ect.). The IDU-ODU
service connection takes place through two FSK-modulated sub-carriers, with 7 MHz
and 10 MHz.
2.1.6.3
ODU power supply

The IDU-ODU interconnection cable is used also to carry the secondary DC voltage
(-48 V) to supply the ODU. The DC voltage comes from the relevant BB+MODEM unit
in the IDU.
In this unit are also present the soft-start circuits, the current limitation circuits and the
alarm circuits to generate the open cable alarm and the short-circuit on the cable alarm.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-17
2 - PLANNING

2.1.7
2.1.7.1
System protection
1+1 protection
SRA 4 implements a very flexible and effecting switching platform.
The switching system protects traffic from any possible anomalous conditions:
HW faults
Tributary and RF loss of signal
CPU controller faults
The complete path from the source to the final destination can be effectively protected.
SRA 4 provides the tributary protection. The same signal (Overhead and Payload) is
available on both the tributary interfaces protecting the traffic even by possible tributary
loss of signal.
Hot Standby, Frequency Diversity with Single or Double tributary interface options allow
users to implement their own protection requirements just selecting the most suitable
system set-up.
Fig. 2.10 shows the 1+1 configuration without the tributary protection (STI).
Fig. 2.11 shows the 1+1 configuration with the tributary protection (DTI).
2.1.7.1.1 Switching criteria in the Tx Switch (Trib. Switch)

Tab. 2.9
Switching criteria in the Tx Switch (Trib. Switch)

Switching Criteria
Switch Type
Los Tx
Lof Tx
TIM Tx
TX PLL clock
Unrevertive
RX PLL clock
Ref clock

2-18
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.1.7.1.2 Switching criteria in the Rx Switch (Dem. Switch)
Tab. 2.10
Type of Dem switching:
Hitless/errors free
Switching mode "Revertive / non revertive" (SW settable)
Switching criteria in the Rx Switch (Dem. Switch)

ALARM
PRIORITY
Note
Demodulator Alarm
Demodulator Alarm covers the entire HW

RX chain
RADIO LOF
LOF SDH in 1xSTM-1 case
SDH LOF (in BB)
LOF SDH of each STM-1 in 2xSTM-1

case
BB Card Fail
EXCESSIVE BER
BER approx. in the range 10^-4 and 10^-6
HIGH BER
BER approx. in the range 10^-7 and 10^-9
LOW BER
BER approx. in the range 10^-11 and

10^-13
In the revertive mode the main channel (with higher priority) is always selected not only
if it has a better quality than the secondary channel (having a lower priority) but also if it
has an equal one.
In the unrevertive mode there isn't a real main channel, so when the protection channel
is on line there is no switching when the main channel becomes normal again (and
viceversa).
2.1.7.1.3 Switching criteria in the ODU Hot Stand-by Switch

Tab. 2.11
Switching criteria in the ODU Hot Stand-by Switch

Switching Criteria
Switch Type
Mod Fail
IF Cable
FSK_ALM _UP
Odu TX ALM
Unrevertive
Odu PS Alm
ODU uP ALM

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-19
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.10
(*)
2 Mbit/s Wayside
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
(**)
1+1 configuration system block diagram without tributary protection ( with SRA4
IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1)
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
WS Interface
WS processing
BB UNIT 1
Data Interface
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
A1
L-RSOH
Switch
A
Modulator
A2
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
(**)
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
(*)
Switch
B
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
B1
ODU
Demodulator
L-RSOH
B2
Data Interface
2 Mbit/s Wayside
WS Interface
WS processing
1+1
BASE BAND
INTERCONNECTION
BB UNIT 2
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
A1
L-RSOH
Switch
A
Modulator
A2
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Switch
B
B1
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
ODU
Demodulator
B2
(*) Do not foreseen in SRA4 IDU-STM1.

(**) 2xSTM1 do not foreseen in SRA4 IDU-STM1.

2-20
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.11
1+1 configuration system block diagram with tributary protection( with SRA4 IDU
only)
2 Mbit/s Wayside
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
WS Interface
WS processing
BB UNIT 1
Data Interface
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
A1
L-RSOH
Switch
A
Modulator
A2
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
Switch
B
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
B1
ODU
Demodulator
L-RSOH
B2
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
Data Interface
2 Mbit/s Wayside
WS Interface
WS processing
1+1
BASE BAND
INTERCONNECTION
BB UNIT 2
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
A1
L-RSOH
Switch
A
Modulator
A2
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
Switch
B
B1
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
ODU
Demodulator
B2

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-21
2 - PLANNING

2.1.7.2
N+1 protection (with SRA4 IDU only)

Two IDUs (MAIN and EXT) are required and they are interconnected with two different
cables: E-link cable between the two controller cards and B-link cable between the
upper BB-modem boards (physical board 1) of the two IDUs.
2+1 system configuration is equal to 3+1 system configuration, with the exception of the
fourth BB-modem card (physical card 2 of IDU EXT), which is not equipped in 2+1
system type.
BB-modem cards 1, 2 and 3 (corresponding respectively to physical card 2 of IDU 1,
card 1 of IDU 2 and card 2 of IDU 2) support tributary signals and radio protected
channel 1, 2 and 3 respectively. BB-modem card S (corresponding to card 1 of IDU 1)
supports radio stand-by channel (protecting channel); "occasional" tributary signals
(signals to be transmitted on the protecting channel when no protection requests are
present) are not foreseen.
Fig. 2.13 and Fig. 2.14 show a block diagram relevant to the Tx section and Rx section
respectively.
"Expansion" IDU controller card is mainly used for switching management purposes (RS
controller functionality): it manages the radio alarms and the card fail alarms received
from the NE controller; it exchanges messages (via SCS channels) with the peer RS
Controller housed in the remote station and configures all the switches according to the
switching priorities and configurations received from the NE controller (user
configurations).
"Expansion" IDU alarm restitution unit is not used.
Physical channels used inside the NE to manage switching functionality in 3+1 system
type are depicted in Fig. 2.12. The same channels are used in 2+1 system type, with the
difference that BB-modem 3 is not equipped (corresponding channels are not supported
and corresponding alarms are not managed).
The protection channel may be used to protect, at the same time, different protected
channels in the two directions (for example, channel 1 from the local station to the
remote one and channel 3 from the remote station to the local one).
Local RS Controller sends switching requirements to the remote one according to local
alarms of the receiving sections, then the remote RS Controller can decide to use the
protecting channel to transmit the requested tributary signal(s) according to the received
requirements or not to use it according to its local alarms (more explanations are given
in the following).
The switching is of hitless type.

2-22
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Physical channels used to manage switching functionality in 3+1 system type
Main IDU
Fig. 2.12
alarms and
commands
I 2C
bus
Controller
BB-modem S
alarms and
commands
BB-modem 1
SCS 1
B-link
E-link
SCS 1
SCS 2
SPI
interrupt
I 2C
bus
alarms and
commands
BB-modem 3
CAF
alarms and
commands
Expansion IDU
RS
controller
BB-modem 2
2.1.7.2.1 NE Controller behaviour

The "main" IDU controller is the NE controller. It manages all the NE configurations and
transmits the alarms to the EMS (Element Manager System). A specific behaviour is
required in double IDU configurations as detailed in this paragraph.
When a configuration change is required from LCT/EMS, it checks if the "expansion"
IDU is involved:
if it is not involved, it behaves like a NE controller of a single IDU based system

type;
if the "expansion" IDU is involved, it accepts the configuration only if the

"expansion" controller accepts the configuration too.
Accepted configurations are saved both in controller's non volatile memory and into
Configuration Memory key.
NE Controller also verifies that switching configurations (priorities, forcing, and so on)
can be accepted.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-23
2 - PLANNING

2.1.7.2.2 BB Card Equipping and Configuration
It is possible to have different tributary interfaces (electrical and optical ones) for the
different BB-modem cards equipping a NE.
All the BB-modem cards must be configured with the same tributary capacity (STM-1 or
2xSTM-1) and with the same modulation format.
2.1.7.2.3 Auxiliary Channels

Every BB-modem card supporting a protected channel can support the following
Auxiliary (also known as Service) Channels:
one 2 Mb/s way-side channel;
one 64 kbit/s user channel, with selectable interface (G.703 or V.11).
One byte only (F1 byte) is always available in STM-1 frame in N+1 system types,
so just one 64 kbit/s user channel can be transmitted (per each BB-modem card).
2.1.7.2.4 RS Controller and Protection Switching

RS Controller is the main functionality performed by the "expansion" controller in N+1
system types; it has to manage all the switching criteria, according to configurations
received from NE controller, local alarms and messages exchanged with the remote
station using SCS channels (for redundancy two 64 kbit/s channels are used, they
occupy S23 RSOH byte in STM1#1 of Channels 1 and 2).
Switching requests are sent to the remote RS Controller according to the estimated
quality of every single received radio channel and taking into account all the
configurations (received RF signal quality forcing, etc., as explained in the following) and
also software detected alarms (such as card fails), which are passed from the NE
controller to the RS Controller via E-link.
The decision for switching is always taken by the receiving side and also the forcing
conditions in a specific network element are referred to the received channels. The
transmitter side shall only actuate the requests of the remote station (and acknowledge
the execution of the request).
CAF: channel quality, local alarms and commands
CAF (Control and Alarm Frame) is a communication channel that goes through all the
BB-Modem cards (via back panel inside the same IDU and via B-Link between the two
IDUs). This information is made available to the "expansion" controller via SPI bus. It
carries alarms and commands related to N+1 switching functionality.
Quality (alarm state related) levels of the received RF channels, from the highest quality
to the lowest one, are:
normal;
early warning low (E_W_L) alarm active;
early warning high (E_W_H) alarm active;
high BER (H_BER) alarm active.

2-24
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

This information is transmitted by each BB-modem card to the RS Controller using CAF.
The protecting channel (from the remote station to the local one) will be occupied by the
signal transmitted on the protected channel with the worst quality, if the protecting
channel has a better quality than the selected protected channel.
Other (local) information transmitted on the CAF are:
out of Frame condition for each demodulated STM-1 signal (from BB to RS

controller);
major alarm for the transmitting section (one for each BB/modem-ODU chain; from
BB to RS Controller);
major alarm for the receiving section (one for each BB/modem-ODU chain; from
BB to RS Controller);
alarms related to the protection channel (from BB to RS Controller);
delay compensation between the two data streams, from radio side to tributary
side, for each hitless switch (from BB to RS Controller);
detection of an AIS insertion from the remote station to the local station;
commands for all the switches (from RS Controller to each BB).
Protection exclusion, protection forcing and priority

A quality level can be forced via LCT for each channel and the selected quality has
higher priority than the actual RF channel quality: in case of quality forcing, RS
Controller replaces the actual measure with the forced quality level when selecting the
radio channel to be protected and manual/test indication is activated.
Each protected channel can be configured via LCT to not occupy the protecting channel.
The RS Controller ignores the actual RF quality level of that protected channel when
selecting the radio channel to be protected; manual/test indication is activated.
The protection functionality itself can be disabled (RPS Locked command): N+1 system
type becomes a N+0 system type.
Each of the protected channels can be configured to occupy the protecting channel.
The RS Controller ignores the quality levels of all the protected channels and requires
the remote RS Controller to transmit the selected protected channel on the protecting
radio channel; after the confirmation of the remote RS Controller, the local one will
switch the Rx section of the selected channel on the data stream received from the
stand-by channel. Manual/test indication is activated.
Each of the protected channels can be configured to occupy the protecting channel
when no quality-related alarms are active for any protected channel. The RS Controller
requests to the remote RS Controller to transmit the selected protected channel on the
protecting channel, but, after the confirmation of the remote RS Controller, the local one
will keep on using, in the receiver section, the protected channel ignoring the protecting
one.
Two (or three) protected channels may activate the same quality level alarm at the same
time or at different times. The following rules apply:
if equal quality alarms are detected at the same time, the protecting channel will be
requested for the protected channel with the lowest index (the index is equal to the
corresponding logical BB-modem card index, i.e. 1, 2 and 3);

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-25
2 - PLANNING
a protected channel occupying the protecting one won't be switched back to the
working one, if another protected channel with a lower index activates the same
quality alarm later.
RPS Locked Mode

In RPS (Radio Protection Switching) Locked mode the switching functionality is
temporarily disabled. All received working channels are forced in normal state and no
requests are sent to the remote RS Controller to require the transmission of a selected
protected channel on the protecting channel.
RS Controller enters the RPS Locked mode and transmits a message to the remote RS
controller to make it aware of the situation in the following cases:
command disabling the Radio Protection Switching functionality (RPS Locked

command);
receiving alarm active on both the SCS channels;
Stand-By Channel is no longer able to support the switching functionality (software

disconnection or any hardware alarm affecting the transmit section or the receive
section);
Channel 2 is no longer able to support the switching functionality (software

disconnection or hardware fault affecting base band portion);
B-link failure (detected via CAF).
RS Controller enters the RPS Locked mode if it receives a "RPS Locked" message from
the remote RS Controller but, in this case, it does not transmit a message to the remote
RS controller, otherwise a loop would arise (each station will keep on staying in RPS
Locked mode because the remote one is in RPS Locked mode).
RS Controller Frozen Mode
If the NE Controller enters the Frozen mode, the RS controller is also controlled to enter
the Frozen mode.
When in Frozen mode, the RS Controller freezes the position of the switches in the
receiving side and does not take into account any change in the radio alarm states.
Configurations affecting the "quality function" of the channels is refused.
Switching in transmission direction is still performed according to messages transmitted
by the remote RS Controller.
Frozen mode is usually entered as a consequent action of a failure detection.

2-26
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Messages on SCS channels
Two 64 kbit/s channels are used at radio level to connect the two RS Controllers.
Transmitted messages can be divided into two categories: urgent and non urgent.
Urgent messages are the ones used to manage the switching: requests to transmit a
specified protected channel signal on the protecting (stand-by) radio channel and
confirmations that a protected channel is being transmitted on the protecting channel.
These messages are transmitted on both the SCS channels and are repeated 5 times
to have a higher probability that the remote RS Controller receives them. In case more
urgent messages have to be transmitted, they are interleaved to reduce delays.
Non urgent messages are cyclically and alternatively transmitted on the two channels.
They are relevant to switching criteria and switching alarms of each channel, channels
occupying the protecting channel, channel disabling (user's configuration or automatic
internal decision due to failure), SCS alarms, CAF alarm and working condition of RS
Controller (Frozen mode, RPS Locked). If no cyclical messages are received for 200 ms,
SCS alarm is activated.
Useless protection switching are avoided
It is useless occupying a radio protecting channel with severely degraded tributary
signal(s).
Switching requests are not transmitted if on the remote station:
LOS, LOF or TIM tributary alarm is present (on the corresponding BB-modem)
when tributary capacity is configured as STM-1 (both alarms are seen as an out of
frame alarm from the RS Controller via the CAF signal);
LOS, LOF or TIM alarms are present on both tributary signals (on the
corresponding BB-modem) when tributary capacity is configured as 2xSTM-1.
If LOS/LOF/TIM tributary side alarms are detected on BB-modem card i, a proper setting
the 4 most significant bits of SOH S22 byte (the same used for ATPC messages) in the
SDH frame of STM-1#1 signal transmitted to the remote station is performed. The
remote RS Controller will be made aware of the condition and will not request the
protection of this channel.
Refusing a protection switching request
It might happen that a protection switching request transmitted from the local RS
Controller could not be accomplished by the remote RS Controller for some reason
(faulty condition or something else).
No message is foreseen to inform the peer RS Controller that a request has not been
accomplished. Local RS Controller infers its request has not been accomplished if it
doesn't receive an acknowledge message from the remote RS Controller within 200 ms.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-27
2 - PLANNING

Switching sequence examples
Let's consider a 3+1 system type in the following situation:
no forcing configuration enabled (completely automatic switching);
no quality alarm active on the received radio channels;
each tributary signal obtained selecting the corresponding protected RF channel;
protecting RF channel transporting channel 1.
In the following example, two switching sequences are analyzed, due to the activation
of an "Early Warning Low" alarm on channel 3 (point A) and then of a "Early Warning
High" alarm on channel 1 while E_W_L alarm is still active on channel 3 (point C).
a)
Early Warning Low alarm is activated by protected channel 3 demodulator and

passed to local RS Controller via CAF signal.
1.
Local RS Controller verifies there isn't any alarm affecting protecting channel.
2.
Local RS Controller transmits a request to the remote RS Controller (using

both SCS channels) to transmit signal 3 also on the protecting channel.
3.
Remote RS Controller accomplishes the request of the local RS Controller

and transmits to the local RS Controller (via SCS channels) the message
stating channel 3 is transmitted also on the protecting channel.
4.
Local RS Controller verifies that delay compensation has been reached in

receiving section switch 3, then it moves Rx switch 3 from protected channel
3 side to protection side.
b)
Early Warning Low alarm is activated by protected channel 1 demodulator and

passed to local RS Controller via CAF signal. Local RS Controller does not take
any consequent action because the same quality level alarm is active on protected
RF channel 3, and channel 3 is already occupying the protecting channel.
c)
Early Warning High alarm is activated by protected channel 1 demodulator and

passed to local RS Controller via CAF signal.
1.
Local RS Controller verifies quality related level of the protecting channel is

better than the quality level of protected channel 1. It also verifies that the
quality level of the protected channel 1 is currently worse than the quality level
of the protected channel 3 (currently occupying the protecting channel).
2.
Local RS Controller verifies the delay alignment in Rx switch 3 and then

moves it back on the protected channel 3.
3.
Local RS Controller transmits a request to the remote RS Controller (using

both SCS channels) to transmit signal 1 also on the protecting channel.
4.
Remote RS Controller accomplishes the request of the local RS Controller

and transmits to the local RS Controller (via SCS channels) the message
stating channel 1 is transmitted also on the protecting channel.
5.
Local RS Controller verifies that delay compensation has been reached in

receiving section switch 1, then it moves Rx switch 1 from protected side to
protection side.

2-28
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.13
N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Tx section
Tx Distributor
Tx
St.by
Not Used
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
BB UNIT "1"
Modulator
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Stand-by Channel - IDU Main
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
To Demodulator
BB UNIT "2"
2 Mbit/s Wayside
Tx
CH.1
ODU
WS Interface
WS Processing
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Data Interface
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
SDH Interface
Modulator
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Channel 1 - IDU Main
2 Mbit/s Wayside
Tx
CH.2
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
To Demodulator
BB UNIT "1"
WS Interface
WS Processing
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Data Interface
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
SDH Interface
Modulator
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Channel 2 - IDU Exp.
2 Mbit/s Wayside
Tx
CH.3
ODU
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
ODU
To Demodulator
BB UNIT "2"
WS Interface
WS Processing
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Data Interface
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
SDH Interface
Modulator
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
ODU
To Demodulator

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-29
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.14
N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Rx section
BB UNIT "1"
From Modulator
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
ODU
Rx Distributor
Rx
St.by
Not Used
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Demodulator
Stand-by Channel - IDU Main

From Modulator
BB UNIT "2"
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
1xSTM-1 o
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
Rx
CH.1
SDH Interface
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
ODU
Demodulator
Data Interface
2 Mbit/s Wayside
WS Interface
WS Processing
Channel 1 - IDU Main

From Modulator
BB UNIT "1"
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
1xSTM-1 o
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
Rx
CH.2
SDH Interface
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
ODU
Demodulator
Data Interface
2 Mbit/s Wayside
WS Interface
WS Processing
From Modulator
BB UNIT "2"
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
1xSTM-1 o
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
Rx
CH.3
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
ODU
Demodulator
Data Interface
2 Mbit/s Wayside
WS Interface
WS Processing

2-30
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.1.8
System maintenance
A wide range of pole mountings allows an easy ODU installation to cover any possible
outdoor installation condition. Several mounting structures, holding one or more ODUs,
are available for integrated or separated ODU Antenna connections.
A Back-up Memory Key, plugged on the front panel of the Alarm Restitution unit in the
IDU, contains all the configuration data. Once configured, the system writes all the
set-up parameters on the Back-up Memory Key.
SRA 4 has been designed to simplify as much as possible all the system-related
operations, from installation to supervision, from upgrading to replacement of the units.
2.1.9
System power supply

The system, when 1+0/1+1/2+0 configured, consists of one IDU assembly plus one or
two ODUs; while when 2+1/3+1 configured, it consists of two IDU assemblies and three
or four ODUs.
Each IDU assembly can be powered from any BB/Modem unit or from both through a
battery voltage (-48V20%) delivered by the station.
Protection to power inputting from the station is afforded through the two BB/Modem
units in an IDU assembly implemented by connecting the Vmain to the PWR socket
present on BB/Modem 1 and the Vreserve (when required) to the PWR socket present
on BB/ Modem 2 (the position of the BB/Modem units inside the IDU assembly is shown
in Fig. 2.2).
When the Vreserve is not present, the BB/Modem units must be contemporarily
powered from the same power source through two separate cables thereby allowing to
carry out maintenance works on one of the two BB/Modem units without compromising
system operation (typical for 1+1 equipment).
The distribution pattern of the auxiliary power supply within the BB Modem units and IDU
assembly is illustrated in Fig. 2.15.
The Relay Block (RL) is activated through the manual command (PW1/2__SW1/2o)
situated on the Alarms Restitution unit thereby allowing to distribute the power delivered
by the station to other units.
Should the polarity at the input pins not be compatible, a circuit present on the cited
block will invalidate the manual command thereby not energizing the relay.
After having successfully surpassed the Relay Block, the -48V is decoupled through
the diodes in order to parallel-power the two BB/Modem units and relative ODU's.
Each BB/Modem unit generates a filtered -48V (-48F) which serves to power the
Controller unit and the Alarms unit: the latter will in turn power the Fan unit. With regard
to power supply protection, the -48F are OR'ed on the Back-panel.
A Fan management circuit is fitted on the Alarms Restitution unit. The circuit is powered
by a subsidiary source outputting from the BB/Modem units (3v3BB) that are OR'ed on
the Back-panel, and by a power supply (3,3V) generated by the Controller unit
(SPI_ALIM). The latter power supply keeps the circuit live for the management of the
Fan circuit should the 3v3BB source fail.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-31
2-32
FAN
-VFAN.i
+VFAN.i
-VFAN.o
+VFAN.o
-VF.i
+VF.i
3V3BB.i
PW2_SW1/2.o
SPI_ALIM.i
PW1_SW1/2.o
to ODU
cable
-VF.o
-VMAIN
-48F
DC/DC
-48F
DC/DC
BAND 22
BBBASE
Modem
-VF.o
+VF.o
3V3BB.o
terziary p.s.
MODEM 2
-48 with IF
cable
control
+
insert IF
C-IF
BAND 1
1
BBBASE
Modem
+VF.o
3V3BB.o
terziary p.s.
MODEM 1
-48 with IF
+VMAIN
SPI_ALIM
to ODU
cable
FI
ODU
filter
FI
FO
ODU
filter
-48V Input
PWR
SB
battery sens.
RL
-48V Input
PWR
battery sens.
SB
RL
ALMBAT.o
PW_SW1/2.i
-VBAT.i
-VBAT.o
+VBAT
-VODU.i
-VODU.o
ALMBAT.o
PW_SW1/2.i
-VBAT.i
-VBAT.o
+VBAT
-VODU.i
-VODU.o
Fig. 2.15
ALARM
RESTITUTION
CONTROLLER
cable
control
+
insert IF
C-IF
2 - PLANNING

Battery protection block diagram (in IDU assembly)
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.1.10
Facility & services

The SDH signal contains several standardized overhead bytes for operation,
maintenance, communication and performance monitoring functions.
The SOH bytes are divided into two separate areas: the rows 1 to 3 (27 bytes) are
accessed and processed within the Regenerator Section (RS) and are defined
Regenerator Section OverHead (RSOH), while the 45 bytes included in the rows 5 to 9
of the SOH pattern are called Multiplex Section OverHead (MSOH) bytes and are
available for equipment terminating a Multiplex Section (MS).
SRA 4 allows the access to rows 1 to 3 as it is used only as Regenerator Section (RST).
The functions of the various bytes in SOH are summarised in Fig. 2.16 and Tab. 2.12
(according to ETSI/TM4, ITU-T/G. 708-Study Group 13 and ITU-R Study Group 9),
based on the present proposal for the allocation of 6 "media-specific" bytes: see rows 2
and 3 (S22, S23, S25, S32, S33 and S35) of the RSOH (Regeneration Section OverHead)
area.
1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0
M E1 M
F1 X
3 D1 M
M D2 M
D3
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaa
aaaa
aaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
2 B1 M
X
X
POINTER AU
5 B2 B2 B2 K1
K2
6 D4
D5
D6
7 D7
D8
D9
8 D10
D11
D12
MSOH
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
9 S1 Z1 Z1 Z2 Z2 M1 E2 X
Bytes reserved for

national use (6)
RSOH
Bytes for media

specific usage (6)
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
SOH Bytes Management
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
Fig. 2.16
Bytes reserved for

future international
standardization (26)

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-33
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.12
Section OverHead bytes

Byte
Rows
13
Name and Functions

A 1, A 2:
frame alignment bytes
B 1:
parity byte for elementary regenerator section BER

monitoring
J0:
path trace identifier
D1 to D3:
Data Comunication Channels (DCCR)
E 1:
omnibus/express voice service channel, regeneration

section
F1:
64 kbit/s data user channel
Byte reserved for media specific use:

S22
S23
S32
S25, S33, S35
Byte used for ATCP

Byte used for 64 kbit/s data channel or SCS signal in N+1
application
Byte used for supervision
Byte used for the wayside traffic
Bytes reserved for national use:

used by wayside traffic
Bytes reserved for future international standardization:

used temporary by the wayside traffic
4
Total
2.1.10.1
27
Equipment management
SRA 4 management systems carry out all the functions required to minimising
operational costs.
LCT, the system dedicated to the local link management, connects the SRA 4 local and
far-and terminals through the F interface.
In addition NetViewer, combining Element with Network Management functions, is the
Radio Network Manager for all the Siemens Radio Systems.
Security Management, Fault management, Configuration Set-up, Performance
Management, Metering are performed by both LCT and NetViewer, by the former on a
link base, by the latter pointing to each of the Radio Systems connected to the network.
Even when the NetViewer is connected to the network, LCT can make the link
reconfiguration at any based network point.
Fig. 2.17 shows SRA 4, running TCP/IP stack.
The system can route management signals either through a pure SDH network (DCC-R)
or through any TCP/IP- based DCN.

2-34
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.17
Equipment Management Architecture

Radio Side
R
F
LCT
SRA 4 management through
TCP/IP DCN networks
Local
Terminal
CPU
LAN
DCN
TCP/IP
Routing Ports
Remote
Terminal
CPU
NetViewer/
ENMS
F: RS232
Q: 10/100 Base-T
R: SOH byte (S23)
2.1.10.1.1 F interface
The Controller unit makes available outside a 38.4 kbit/s data channel (RS-232C
standard) LCT connector to connect a local PC to configure, preset and supervise the
local equipment.
During the normal operation of the equipment the connection to the LCT connector is
not necessary; the LCT can be used only during the commissioning and during the local
maintenance activities.
With regard to 1+0/1+1/2+0 systems consisting of only one IDU, the local operator must
connect the PC to the LCT connector situated on the front panel of the CONTROLLER
unit.
With regard to N+1 (2+1/3+1) systems consisting of two IDU's, the local operator must
connect the PC to the LCT connector situated on the front panel of the CONTROLLER
unit on the IDU MAIN assembly (see Fig. 2.5).
2.1.10.1.2 Q interface
The IDU makes available outside a data channel to transport the TMN information of a
radio network to the supervisory center.
Channel Q can be accessed externally with the 10/100 BASE-T electrical interface
(connector "Q-LAN" situated on the front panel of the controller unit).
Connector "Q-LAN", situated on the Controller unit, is used on systems 1+0/1+1/2+0
consisting of an IDU assembly.
Connector "Q-LAN" of the "IDU MAIN" assembly is used on systems N+1 (2+1/3+1)
consisting of two IDU assemblies.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-35
2 - PLANNING

2.1.11
Mechanical structure
The mechanical structure of the IDU and ODU meets the ETSI standard (ETS 300
119-1, 3, 4).
The plug-in IDU is installed in a 2200 mm (Height) x 600 mm (Length) x 300 mm (Depth)
rack.
In the adopted solution, with only frontal access, particular efforts have been dedicated
on the shielding of the plug-in indoor unit to meet the EMC and EMI specifications.
Installation solutions: wall-installation and floor-installation in the center of the room (for
in-line and back to back configurations).
2.1.12
Configurations
The available configurations and the IDU and ODU compositions of SRA 4 equipment
are listed in par. 2.3 "EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION".

2-36
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.2 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
In this paragraph the main electrical characteristics, the mechanical characteristics, and
the operating environmental conditions relevant to the SRA 4 equipment are listed.
2.2.1
2.2.1.1
Electrical Characteristics
General Electrical Characteristics
SDH frame structure
STM-1
Bit Rate 1xSTM-1
155.52 Mbit/s 20 ppm
Bit Rate 2xSTM-1

2x155.52 Mbit/s 20 ppm
Note : The two STM-1 signals must be synchronous.
I
In the SRA4 IDU-STM1 not supported.
STM-1 interface:
electrical
optical
ITU-T G.703
ITU-T G.957 S-1.1
6 GHz RF frequency range (ITU-R):
6L: F.383-7 (5925-6425 MHz)
6U: F.384-7 (6430-7110 MHz)
F.385-6 Annex 1 (7425-7725 MHz)
F.385-6 Annex 3 (7110-7750 MHz lower)
F.385-6 Annex 3 (7110-7750 MHz upper)
F.385-6 Annex 4 (7425-7900 MHz)
F.385-6 (f0=7275 MHz) (7125-7425 MHz)
F.385-6 (f0=7575 MHz) (7425-7725 MHz)
Custom (Finland) (7125-7425 MHz)
F.386-6 (8200-8500 MHz)
F.386-6 Annex 1 (7725-8275 MHz)
ITU-R/OIRT F.386-6 Annex 4 (7900-8400 MHz)
F.386-6 Annex 3 (8200-8500 MHz)
10 GHz RF frequency range (CEPT):
CEPT. Rec.12-05 (10000-10680 MHz)
F.387 Recommends 1 (10700-11700 MHz)
F.387 Annex 1 (10700-11700 MHz)
F.387 Annex 2 (10700-11700 MHz)
F.497-6 (12750-13750 MHz)
Channelling:
6L GHz (128 TCM - 4D)
6U GHz (64 or 128 TCM - 4D)
7 GHz (128 TCM - 4D)
8 GHz (128 TCM - 4D)
see par. 2.2.7.1

see par. 2.2.7.2
see par. 2.2.7.3
see par. 2.2.7.4

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-37
2 - PLANNING
10 GHz (128 TCM - 4D)

11 GHz (64 or 128 TCM - 4D)
13 GHz (128 TCM - 4D)
Shifter frequency:
6L GHz
6U GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
10 GHz
11 GHz
13 GHz
see par. 2.2.7.5

see par. 2.2.7.6
see par. 2.2.7.7
252 MHz
340 MHz
154/161/168/196/245 MHz
151.614/266/311.32 MHz
350 MHz
490/530 MHz
266 MHz
Output connector toward the antenna:
6L GHz
6U GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
10 GHz
11 GHz
13 GHz
R70 waveguide
R70 waveguide
R84 waveguide
R84 waveguide
R100 waveguide
R100 waveguide
R120 waveguide
Antenna output flange:
6L GHz
6U GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
10 GHz
11 GHz
13 GHz
UDR 70
UDR 70
UDR 84
UDR 84
UDR 100
UDR 100
UDR 120
Modulation
64 TCM-4D/128 TCM-4D
Tx intermediate frequency
350 MHz
Rx intermediate frequency
140 MHz
FSK input/output frequency
7 MHz
FSK output/ input frequency
10 MHz
Lightning protection
according to IEC 61000-4-5
Range of temperature with guaranteed

performances
-33 C to +55 C (outdoor unit)

-5 C to +50 C (indoor unit)

2-38
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.2.1.2
IDU/ODU Connection Characteristics
Max. IDU/ODU distance:
with 3/10 50 ohm coax. cable
with 1/4 50 ohm coax. cable
190 m
250 m
Note: the 1/4 50 ohm coax. cable is delivered on demand.
Modulator output IF level
+5 dBm
ODU output IF level
-16 dBm 2 dB
Software setting
short cable/long cable
According to the type of the cable and to the L lenght a setting must be set via software:
short cable or long cable as explained in the Tab. 2.13.
Tab. 2.13
Short cable/Long cable setting

1/4 coax. cable
Braided coax. cable
short cable
long cable
short cable
long cable
L < 95 m 5 m
L > 95 m 5 m
L < 60 m 5 m
L > 60 m 5 m

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-39
2 - PLANNING

2.2.1.3
Transmitter Characteristics
Note: For the Tx output power of the Hot Standby version, see the par. 2.2.1.4.
Tab. 2.14
Max output power (typical value and tolerance at ODU flange)
6L/6U GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
10 GHz
11 GHz
13 GHz
+23 dBm 1 dB
+23 dBm 1 dB
+23 dBm 1 dB
+21 dBm 1 dB
+21 dBm 1 dB
+20 dBm 1 dB
Tab. 2.15
Max output power (guaranteed value at ODU flange)
6L/6U GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
10 GHz
11 GHz
13 GHz
+22 dBm
+22 dBm
+22 dBm
+20 dBm
+20 dBm
+19 dBm
Tab. 2.16
RF transmitted spectrum
6L
6U
AP:
AP:
7 GHz
AP:
8 GHz
AP:
10 GHz
AP:
11 GHz
AP:
13 GHz
AP:
128 TCM, EN 300 234 EN 301 461 EN 300 234 EN 300 234 EN 300 234 EN 301 461 EN 300 234
CC:
CC:
CC:
CC:
CC:
CC:
1xSTM-1 CC:
EN 301 127 EN 301 461 EN 301 127 EN 301 127 N.A.
64 TCM,
1xSTM-1
CC:
EN 301 461
2.2.1.4
EN 301 461 EN 301 127

CC:
EN 301 461
IF frequency
350 MHz 500 kHz
Return losses at the ODU RF output
15 dB
Frequency stability within the temperature

range -33 to +55
5 ppm
Characteristics of the Transmitter (Hot Standby version)

In the HSBY system consider the following additional loss.
Hot Standby system with balanced coupler (splitter)
Main channel
3.3 dB
Stand-by channel
3.3 dB
Hot Standby system with unbalanced coupler
Main channel
1.5 dB
Stand-by channel
11.5 dB

2-40
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.2.1.5
Receiver Characteristics
Tab. 2.17
Rx guaranteed thresholds (dBm) for 128 TCM - 4D at ETSI point C
Band
Threshold BER 10-6 (dBm)
-8
Threshold BER 10 (dBm)
Tab. 2.18
Range of RF input level within which the IF output is kept at nominal level (-16 dBm
1 dB):
6L GHz
da -20 a -80 dBm
6U GHz
da -20 a -80 dBm
7 GHz
da -20 a -80 dBm
8 GHz
da -20 a -80 dBm
10 GHz
da -20 a -80 dBm
11 GHz
da -20 a -80 dBm
13 GHz
da -20 a -80 dBm
6L/6U GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
10 GHz
11 GHz
13 GHz
-70.0
-70.5
-70.0
-70.5
-70.5
-69.5
-69.0
-69.5
-69.0
-69.5
-69.5
-68.5
Rx guaranteed thresholds (dBm) for 64 TCM - 4D at ETSI point C

Band
6U GHz
11 GHz
-6
-72
-71
-8
-71
-70

IF frequency
140 MHz
IF output impedance
50 ohm balanced
2.2.1.5.1 ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control)
2.2.1.6
Tab. 2.19
ATPC type
continuous
Max. ATPC range
15 dB 2 dB
Tx max. power
PMIN + ATPC Range
PRx threshold for ATPC intervention:
128 TCM
64 TCM
selectable via software from -70 to -40 dBm

selectable via software from -70 to -40 dBm
Modemodulator
Modulation Type
Type of modulation
Information
bits/symbol
128 TCM - 4D + Reed Solomon with concatenated coding
6.5
64 TCM - 4D + Reed Solomon with concatenated coding
5.5

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-41
2 - PLANNING

2.2.1.7
Digital Service Channels
F1
1x64 kbit/s (byte F1)

V.11 interface (or G.703 ) (*)(**)
S23
1x64 kbit/s (byte S23)

G.703 interface (or V.11) (*)
Way Side Traffic(***)
2 Mbit/s G.703 interface

(plesiochronous)
(*) If F1 is configured as V.11, S23 must be configured as G.703 or viceversa.

(**) In N+1 configuration byte F1 is used only.
(***) Available with 2xSTM1 BB/Modem unit only.
2.2.1.8
Baseband Interfaces
2.2.1.9
STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s)
electrical
optical
ITU-T G.703
ITU-T G.957 S1.1
1+1 protection
Type of Dem switching
hitless/errors free
Switching mode
settable revertive/non revertive
The feature errors free means that in the entire switching process no bit errors
shall occur at the STM-1 tributary output, that is:
the switching logic shall switch before any bit error incoming;
during the switching no bit errors should occur;
no pattern loss shall occur in the entire process.

The switch criteria are based on S/N (Signal to Noise Ratio) measurements and
not BER estimator.
The Dem switch occurs when there are both the following conditions:
S/N (S/N)threshold
S/N (S/N)protection_flow + hysteresis

where the values of S/N threshold are shown in Tab. 2.20.
Tab. 2.20
Typical Hitless switch thresholds

EW-L Thr.
EW-H Thr.
EW-HH Thr.
S/N
S/N
S/N
Modulation
in
out
in
out
in
out
1xSTM-1 128 TCM
28.7 dB
29.4 dB
26.7 dB
27.5 dB
25.5 dB
26.1 dB
1xSTM-1 64 TCM
25.6 dB
26.6 dB
24.0 dB
24.8 dB
21.8 dB
22.6 dB

2-42
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.2.1.10
External alarms electrical specifications
Input alarm logic state:
floating --> logic 0 --> normal condition
ground --> logic 1 --> alarm condition
Output alarm logic state:
ground --> logic 0 --> ON condition
open --> logic 1 --> OFF condition
Output telecontrol logic state
ground --> logic 0 --> ON condition
open --> logic 1 --> OFF condition
Note: The logical state associated to the alarm condition at the input (station alarms) is
software programmable.
2.2.1.11
System Power Supply

The power supply meets racc. ETSI EN 300-132-2:
Nominal voltage
-48 Vdc 20 %
2.2.1.12
Power Consumption (from 48 V battery)
Tab. 2.21
Maximum Power consumption (from battery 48 V) with 10% tolerance

IDU 1+0
(1xSTM1)
26 W Electrical/27 W Optical
IDU 1+0
(2xSTM1)
IDU 1+1
(1xSTM1)
IDU 1+1
(2xSTM1)
ODU
6LGHz
6U GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
10 GHz
11 GHz
13 GHz
60 W
60 W
60 W
60 W
60 W
60 W
60 W

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-43
2 - PLANNING

2.2.2
Loop-backs
The following 3 loop-backs are available in the IDU on the BB+MODEM unit:
Fig. 2.18
1.
Loop-back 1 (Trib.) - Tributary loop on the STM-1 input/output interface
2.
Lopp-back 2 (Trib. side int.) - Tributary loop inside the BB+MODEM unit (the signal
before the MODEM section is lopped back).
3.
Loop-back 3 (Radio ext.) - Radio loop at the tributary section.
Loop-back 1 (Trib.)
I/O
INTERFACE
BB
SECTION
MODEM
SECTION
BB
SECTION
MODEM
SECTION
BB
SECTION
MODEM
SECTION
STM-1
Fig. 2.19
Loop-back 2 (Trib. side int.)

I/O
INTERFACE
STM-1
Fig. 2.20
Loop-back 3 (Radio ext.)

I/O
INTERFACE
STM-1
All the loopbacks should be set by LCT and TMN.

2-44
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.2.3
Mechanical characteristics
The mechanical characteristics of the indoor equipment are in accordance with the
standards as defined by ETSI (EN 300 119-3, 4, rack and subrack respectively).
The racks are so dimensioned:
height
2200 mm
width
600 mm
depth
300 mm
The IDU sub-rack has the following dimensions:
standard shelf
2 U (ETSI and 19)
The ODU mechanical characteristics are:
height
365 mm
width
280 mm
depth
180 mm
Weight of modules
2.2.4
ETSI rack
57 Kg
Indoor Unit (fully equipped)
5 Kg
Outdoor Unit
9 Kg
Environmental characteristics
The equipment meets the environmental conditions
Indoor equipment:
Normal conditions: Class 3.2
Temperature limits
-5 to +50C
Humidity limits
5% to 95%
Maximum temperature limit
Up to +55C (without
permanent damages)
Outdoor equipment:
Normal conditions: Class 4.1
Temperature limits
-33 to +55C
Humidity limits
15% to 100%

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-45
2 - PLANNING

2.2.5
EMC/EMI
The equipment is compliant to EMI/EMC parameters according to the above listed
standards and to ETSI standards EN 301 489-1 e EN 301 489-4.
Electrostatic discharge
according to IEC 61000-4-2, criterion 1

Level 2 ( 4kV contact), level 3 ( 8kV air ),
RF electromagnetic field immunity

(80-2000 MHz)
according to IEC 61000-4-3, criterion 1

(3 V/m for IDU and 30 V/m for ODU)
Electrical Fast Transient/

Burst (EFT/B) immunity
accord. to IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, criterion 1

(DC lines 2kV; Signal and control lines 1kV)
Surge immunity
accord. to IEC 61000-4-5, criterion 2

Class 2 (Signal and control lines 0.5kV)
Radio frequency common mode

(0.15-80 MHz)
accord. to IEC 61000-4-6, Level 2 (3 Vrms)

criterion 1
Conducted emission
according to EN 55022/CISPR22, Class B
Radiated emission
according to EN 55022/CISPR22, Class B
N.B.:
2.2.6
criterion 1: no degradation of normal performance (no errors)
criterion 2: degradation of normal performance / loss of functionality, with auto

recovery
Safety characteristics
Safety
according to EN 60950-1

2-46
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.2.7
RF Channelling
In the following are listed the tables of the channeling foreseen in the available RF
bands. In the tables is present the 3-digit extension P/N of the ODU, which indicates the
channel at which the ODU has been adjusted in factory. In the tables is also present the
extension P/N of the duplexer, because the duplexer is the only unit in the ODU which
depends on the frequency and for this reason is adjusted in factory according to the RF
channel.
2.2.7.1
6L GHz channelling
By the LCT the channel frequency can be set at 250 kHz step.
Tab. 2.22
6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 MAIN (1 digit cod. 1)

Shifter = 252.040 MHz
GO (MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
RETURN
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
5945,200
101
101
6197,240
151
101
5974,850
102
102
6226,890
152
102
6004,500
103
103
6256,540
153
103
6034.150
104
104
6286,190
154
6063,800
105
105
6315,840
155
6093,450
106
106
6345,490
156
106
6123,100
107
107
6375,140
157
107
6152,750
108
108
6404,790
158
108
Tab. 2.23
Duplexer
P/N
527-703/57
Duplexer
P/N
527-703/57
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
104
105
6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 INTERLEAVED (1 digit cod. 2)

Shifter = 252.040 MHz
GO (MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
RETURN
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
5930,375
201
201
6182,415
251
201
5960,025
202
202
6212,065
252
202
5989,675
203
203
6241,715
253
203
6019,325
204
204
6271,365
254
6048,975
205
205
6301,015
255
6078,625
206
206
6330,665
256
206
6108,275
207
207
6360,315
257
207
6137,925
208
208
6389,965
258
208
Duplexer
P/N
527-703/57
Duplexer
P/N
527-703/57
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
204
205

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-47
2 - PLANNING

2.2.7.2
6U GHz channelling
Tab. 2.24
6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 MAIN (1 digit cod. 3)

Shifter = 340 MHz
Ext.
Ext.
RETURN
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
ODU
Dupl.
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
GO
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
6460
301
301
6800
351
301
6500
302
302
6840
352
302
6540
303
303
6880
353
303
6580
304
304
6920
354
6620
305
305
6960
355
6660
306
306
7000
356
306
6700
307
307
7040
357
307
85
6740
308
308
7080
358
308
Tab. 2.25
Duplexer
P/N
527-703/58
Duplexer
P/N
527-703/58
304
305
6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 INTERLEAVED (1 digit cod. 4)

Shifter = 340 MHz
GO
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
6440
401
401
6780
451
401
6480
402
402
6820
452
402
6520
403
403
6860
453
403
6560
404
404
6920
454
6600
405
405
6940
455
6640
406
406
6980
456
406
6680
407
407
7020
457
407
85
6720
408
408
7060
458
408
Duplexer
P/N
527-703/58
Ext.
Ext.
RETURN
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
Dupl.
ODU
Duplexer
P/N
527-703/58
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
404
405

2-48
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.2.7.3
Tab. 2.26
7 GHz channelling
7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3 (1st digit ext. P/N = 1)
Shifter = 168 MHz
High
=
7597
GO
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
7457
106
106
7625
156
106
7485
107
107
7653
157
107
7513
108
108
7681
158
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/35
Ext.
Ext.
RETURN
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
ODU
Dupl.
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/35
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
108
7541
109
109
7709
159
109
7569
110
110
7737
160
110
Shifter = 196 MHz
Low
=
7297
GO
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
7121
101
7149
102
7177
103
7205
104
7233
105
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/26
527-725/27
Ext.
Ext.
RETURN
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
Dupl.
ODU
101
7317
151
102
7345
152
103
7373
153
104
7401
154
105
7429
155
Duplexer
P/N
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
101
527-705/26
102
103
104
527-705/27
105

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-49
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.27
Shifter = 154 MHz
Tab. 2.28
Ext.
Ext.
RETURN
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
ODU
Dupl.
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
GO
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
7442
201
201
7596
251
201
7470
202
202
7624
252
202
Duplexer
P/N
Duplexer
P/N
7498
203
203
7652
253
7526
204
204
7680
254
204
7554
205
205
7708
255
205
527-705/35
527-705/35
203
7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3)

Shifter = 161 MHz
(F0=7575
)
Ext.
Ext.
RETURN
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
ODU
Dupl.
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
GO
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
7428
321
321
7589
371
321
7435
322
322
7596
372
322
7442
323
323
7603
373
323
7449
324
324
7610
374
324
7456
352
352
7617
375
325
7463
326
326
7624
376
326
7470
327
327
7631
377
327
7477
328
328
7638
378
328
7484
329
329
7645
379
329
10
7491
330
330
7652
380
11
7498
331
331
7659
381
12
7505
332
332
7666
382
332
13
7512
333
333
7673
383
333
14
7519
334
334
7680
384
334
15
7526
335
335
7687
385
335
16
7533
336
336
7694
386
336
17
7540
337
337
7701
387
337
18
7547
338
338
7708
388
338
19
7554
339
339
7715
389
339
20
7561
340
340
7722
390
340
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/35
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/35
330
331

2-50
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.29

Shifter = 161 MHz
Tab. 2.30
Ext.
Ext.
RETURN
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
ODU
Dupl.
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
(F0=7275)
GO
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
7128
301
301
7289
351
301
7135
302
302
7296
352
302
7142
303
303
7303
353
303
7149
304
304
7310
354
304
7156
305
305
7317
355
305
7163
306
306
7324
356
306
7170
307
307
7331
357
307
7177
308
308
7338
358
308
7184
309
309
7345
359
309
10
7191
310
310
7352
360
11
7198
311
311
7359
361
311
12
7205
312
312
7366
362
312
13
7212
313
313
7373
363
313
14
7219
314
314
7380
364
314
15
7226
315
315
7387
365
315
16
7233
316
316
7394
366
316
17
7240
317
317
7401
367
317
18
7247
318
318
7408
368
318
19
7254
319
319
7415
369
20
7261
320
320
7422
370
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/26
527-705/31
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/26
310
319
527-705/31
320
Shifter = 245 MHz
GO
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
7442
401
7470
402
7498
403
7526
404
7554
7582
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/35
Ext.
Ext.
RETURN
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
Dupl.
ODU
401
7687
451
402
7715
452
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/35
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
401
402
403
7743
453
404
7771
454
405
405
7799
455
405
406
406
7827
456
406
7610
407
7638
408
527-705/36
527-705/38
407
7855
457
408
7883
458
403
527-705/36
527-705/38
404
407
408

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-51
2 - PLANNING

2.2.7.4
8 GHz channelling
In the 8 GHz range, some channels have frequencies and shifter that are not
integral multiple values of 250 kHz (minimum resolution allowed by the ODU
configuration software).
In these cases, the ODUs are configured by means of the values reported in bold
and between brackets in the following tables.
Then, the parameters can be different from those defined by the ITU-R channelling
but, considering the frequency stabilty of the 8 GHz ODU, the EN-300-234
reference normative is however respected.
Tab. 2.31
8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 MAIN (1st digit ext. P/N = 1)
Shifter = 311.320 MHz (311.250 MHz)
GO (MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
RETURN
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
7747.700
(7747.750)
101
101
8059.020
(8059.000)
151
101
7777.350
(7777.500)
102
102
8088.670
(8088.750)
152
102
7807.000
(7807.000)
103
103
8118.320
(8118.250)
153
103
7836.650
(7836.750)
104
104
8147.970
(8148.000)
154
104
7866.300
(7866.250)
105
105
8177.620
(8177.500)
155
7895.950
(7896.000)
106
106
8207.270
(8207.250)
156
7925.600
(7925.750)
107
107
8236.920
(8237.000)
157
7955.250
(7955.250)
108
108
8266.570
8266.500)
158
Duplexer P/N
527-705/62
527-705/66
527-705/67
Duplexer P/N
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
527-705/62
527-705/66
105
106
527-705/67
107
108

2-52
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.32
8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 INTERLEAVED

(1st digit ext. P/N = 2)
Shifter = 311.320 MHz (311.250 MHz)
GO (MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
RETURN
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
7732.875
(7733.000)
201
201
8044.195
(8044.250)
251
201
7762.525
(7762.500)
202
202
8073.845
(8073.750)
252
202
7792.175
(7792.250)
203
203
8103.495
(8103.500)
253
7821.825
(7821.750)
204
204
8133.145
(8133.000)
254
204
7851.475
(7851.500)
205
205
8162.795
(8162.750)
255
205
7881.125
(7881.250)
206
206
8192.445
(8192.500)
256
206
7910.775
(7910.750)
207
207
8222.095
(8222.000)
257
7940.425
(7940.500)
208
208
8251.745
8251.750)
258
Tab. 2.33
Duplexer P/N
527-705/62
527-705/67
Duplexer P/N
527-705/62
527-705/67
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
203
207
208
8 GHz channelling according to OIRT/ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 4

Shifter = 266 MHz
GO (MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
7926
301
301
8192
351
301
7954
302
302
8220
352
302
7982
303
303
8248
353
8010
304
304
8276
354
8038
305
8066
306
8094
307
8122
308
Duplexer P/N
527-705/67
527-705/70
527-705/71
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
RETURN
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
305
8304
355
306
8332
356
307
8360
357
308
8388
358
Duplexer P/N
527-705/67
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
303
304
527-705/70
527-705/71
305
306
307
308

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-53
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.34

Shifter = 151.614 MHz (151.500 MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
Ext.
Duplexer P/N P/N
Dupl.
GO (MHz)
8210.048
(8210.000)
401
401
8361.662
(8361.500)
451
401
8233.372
(8233.500)
403
403
8384.986
(8385.000)
453
403
8256.696
(8256.750)
405
405
8408.310
(8408.250)
455
405
8280.020
(8280.000)
407
407
8431.634
(8431.500)
457
407
8303.344
(8303.500)
409
409
8454.958
(8455.000)
459
409
11
8326.668
(8326.750)
411
411
8478.282
(8478.250)
461
411
Tab. 2.35
Ext.
Duplexer P/N P/N
Dupl.
RETURN
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
527-705/73
527-705/73
8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3

Shifter = 119 MHz
GO (MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
8293
001
8307
002
8321
003
8335
004
8349
005
8363
006
Duplexer P/N
527-705/73
527-705/74
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
RETURN
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
001
8412
051
002
8426
052
003
8440
053
004
8454
054
005
8468
055
006
8482
056
Duplexer P/N
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
001
527-705/73
002
003
004
527-705/74
005
006

2-54
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.2.7.5
Tab. 2.36
10 GHz channelling
10 GHz channelling according to CEPT.Rec 12-05
CEPT.Rec 12-05 (Shifter = 350 MHz - 1 digit cod. 1)
ext ODU=100 => TF-MIN=10008
MHz; TF_MAX=10160 MHz
ext ODU=150 => TF-MIN=10358 MHz;

TF_MAX=10510 MHz
GO
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
100
10378
150
10056
100
10406
150
10084
100
10434
150
10112
100
10462
150
10140
100
10490
150
GO
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
10028
Duplexer
P/N
527-904/92
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
001
ext ODU=101 => TF-MIN=101408

MHz; TF_MAX=10300 MHz
GO
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
10168
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
Ext.
P/N
ODU
101
10518
151
10196
101
10546
151
10224
101
10574
151
10252
101
10602
151
10280
101
10630
151
527-904/92
002
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
527-904/92
001
ext ODU=151 => TF-MIN=10498 MHz;

TF_MAX=10650 MHz
GO
(MHz)
Duplexer
P/N
Duplexer
P/N
Duplexer
P/N
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
527-904/92
002

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-55
2 - PLANNING

2.2.7.6
Tab. 2.37
11 GHz channelling
11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 Main
Shifter = 530 MHz
GO (MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
10715
110
007
11245
160
007
10755
110
007
11285
160
007
10795
110
007
11325
160
10835
110
007
11365
160
10875
110
007
11405
160
007
10915
110
007
11445
160
007
10955
111
008
11485
161
008
10995
111
008
11525
161
008
11035
111
10
11075
111
11
11115
12
11155
Tab. 2.38
Duplexer P/N
527-904/84
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
RETURN
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
Duplexer P/N
527-904/84
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
007
007
008
11565
161
008
11605
161
111
008
11645
161
008
111
008
11685
161
008
527-904/84
527-904/84
008
008
11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 Interleaved/Annex 1

Shifter = 530 MHz
GO (MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
RETURN
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
1 (*)
10695
210
009
11225
260
009
2
3
10735
210
009
11265
260
009
10775
210
009
11305
260
10815
210
009
11345
260
10855
210
009
11385
260
009
10895
210
009
11425
260
009
10935
211
010
11465
261
010
10975
211
010
11505
261
010
11015
211
010
11545
261
10
11055
211
010
11585
261
11
11095
211
010
11625
261
010
12
11135
211
010
11665
261
010
Duplexer P/N
527-904/84
527-904/84
Duplexer P/N
527-904/84
527-904/84
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
009
009
010
010
(*) Not available for Annex 1

2-56
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.39
11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Annex 2/CEPT 12-06 Recommends 3

Shifter = 490 MHz
GO (MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
RETURN
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
10735
310
011
11225
360
011
10775
310
011
11265
360
011
10815
310
011
11305
360
10855
310
011
11345
360
10895
310
011
11385
360
011
10935
310
011
11425
360
011
10975
311
012
11465
361
012
11015
311
012
11505
361
012
11055
311
012
11545
361
10
11095
311
012
11585
361
11
11135
311
012
11625
361
012
12
11175
311
012
11665
361
012
2.2.7.7
Tab. 2.40
Duplexer P/N
527-904/84
527-904/84
Duplexer P/N
527-904/84
527-904/84
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
011
011
012
012
13 GHz channelling
13 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.497-6 Main (Interleaved)
(1 digit ext. P/N = 1)
Shifter = 266 MHz
GO (MHz)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12765
(12779)
12793
(12807)
12821
(12835)
12849
(12863)
12877
(12891)
12905
(12919)
12933
(12947)
12961
(12975)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
Duplexer P/N
100
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
001
100
001
527-904/74
100
001
100
001
101
002
101
002
527-904/74
101
002
101
002
RETURN
(MHz)
13031
(13045)
13059
(13073)
13087
(13101)
13115
(13129)
13143
(13157)
13171
(13185)
13199
(13213)
13227
(13241)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
Duplexer P/N
150
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
001
150
001
527-904/74
150
001
150
001
151
002
151
002
527-904/74
151
002
151
002
Note: between brackets the interleaved channelling is shown.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-57
2 - PLANNING

2.3 EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION
This paragraph lists and shows the "main parts" the equipment consists of.
As "main parts" are indented the units which are autonomous from a structural and
functional point of view and are accessible and extractable from the two separate
modules the system consists of:
indoor assembly
outdoor assembly
The outdoor assembly is a transceiver housed in a very compact tight container,

installed on the antenna or on pole.
The indoor assembly consists of an ETSI rack, equipped with one sub-rack IDU.
The two assemblies (sub-racks) are IF-level connected by single coaxial cable.
The optional "EXTERNAL EOW" assembly (P/N 705-102/01), which provides the
EOW functionalities, is described in the relevant UMN manual.

2-58
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.3.1
System configurations
For the equipment are provided the configurations listed in Tab. 2.41.
Tab. 2.41
System configurations
Configuration
1+0
(Note 3)
1+1 HSBY
(Note 3)
Denomination
1+0 system with independent antenna (Note 1)
1+1 system with Hot Standby (Note 2)
Ref. to Figure
Fig. 2.21
Fig. 2.22
2+0 DP
or
1+1 DP
(Note 3)
2+0 system with dual polarization with adjacent

channels or 1+1 system with dual polarization with
adjacent channels (Note 1)
1+1 FD
(Note 3)
1+1 system heterofrequency copolar (with

circulator) (Note 1)
Fig. 2.24
2+0 CC
(Note 4)
2+0 system with dual polarization co-channel

configuration
Fig. 2.25
Fig. 2.23
2x(1+1) FD CC 2x(1+1) system with dual polarization co-channel

(Note 4)
configuration ( with one antenna)
Fig. 2.26
2x(1+1) FD CC 2x(1+1) system with dual polarization co-channel

(Note 4)
configuration ( with two antennas)
Fig. 2.27
2x(1+1)
HSBY CC
(Note 4)
2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization

co-channel configuration
N+1
(2+1/3+1)
(Note 4)
N+1 system with Alternate Pattern (AP)
Fig. 2.28
Fig. 2.29
Fig. 2.30
Note 1: The waveguide connection between ODU and antenna can be flexible or
elliptical type.
Note 2: The coupler can be balanced or unbalanced type.
Note 3: Configuration with SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1.
Note 4: Configuration with SRA4 IDU only.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-59
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.21
1+0 system with independent antenna
FLEXIBLE
WAVE GUIDE
VERTICAL 1+0 SUPPORT
ODU
AP or AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON THE RACK

OF COAXIAL CABLE
IDU
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19)

2-60
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.22
1+1 system with Hot Standby

FLEXIBLE
WAVE GUIDE
ODU
AP or AP/CC
ODU
AP or AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON RACK OF
COAXIAL CABLE
IDU
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19)

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-61
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.23
2+0 system with dual polarization
FLEXIBLE
WAVE GUIDE

FLEXIBLE
WAVE GUIDE
ODU
AP or AP/CC
ODU
AP or AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON RACK OF
COAXIAL CABLE
IDU
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19

2-62
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.24
1+1 system copolar

FLEXIBLE
WAVE GUID
ODU
AP or AP/CC
ODU
AP or AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON RACK OF
COAXIAL CABLE
IDU
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-63
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.25
2+0 system with dual polarization co-channel configuration
FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE
AP/CC ODU
IF LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
AP/CC ODU
RF-LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
RF-LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON RACK OF
COAXIAL CABLE
IDU
EOW
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19

2-64
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.26
2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration (with one antenna)
FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE
ODU SUPPORT
(1+1 co-polar)
IF LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
AP/CC ODU
IF LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
AP/CC ODU
RF LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
ODU SUPPORT
(1+1 co-polar)
AP/CC ODU
AP/CC ODU
RF LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
COAXIAL CABLE
1st IDU (1+1) V-pol.

2nd IDU (1+1) H-pol.
ETSI RACK (19
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-65
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.27
2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration (with two antennas)
FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE
IF LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
ODU SUPPORT
(1+1 cross-polar)
AP/CC ODU
AP/CC ODU
RF-LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
ODU SUPPORT
(1+1 cross-polar)
IF LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
AP/CC ODU
AP/CC ODU
RF-LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
1st IDU (1+1) V-H pol.

2nd IDU (1+1) H-V pol.
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19

2-66
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.28
2x(1+1) Hot Standby with dual polarization co-channel configuration
FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE
ODU SUPPORT
(1+1 HSBY)
IF LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
AP/CC ODU
IF LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
AP/CC ODU
RF-LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
ODU SUPPORT
(1+1 HSBY)
AP/CC ODU
AP/CC ODU
RF-LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
COAXIAL CABLE
1st IDU (1+1) HSBY V-pol.

2nd IDU (1+1) HSBY H-pol.
ETSI RACK (19
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-67
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.29
N+1 (2+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration
ELLIPTICATL
WAVE GUIDES
ELLIPTICATL
WAVE GUIDE
ODU (CH.1)
AP or AP/CC
ODU (ST.BY)
APor AP/CC
ELLIPTICATL
WAVE GUIDE
ODU (CH.2)
AP or AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON RACK OF
COAXIAL CABLE
MAIN IDU (STBY + CH. 1)
EXP IDU (CH. 2)
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19

2-68
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.30
N+1 (3+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration
ELLIPTICATL
WAVE GUIDES
ELLIPTICATL
WAVE GUIDE
ODU (CH.1)
AP or AP/CC
ODU (ST.BY)
APor AP/CC
ELLIPTICATL
WAVE GUIDE
ODU (CH.2)
AP or AP/CC
ODU (CH.2)
APor AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON RACK OF
COAXIAL CABLE
MAIN IDU (STBY + CH. 1)
EXP IDU (CH. 2 + CH.3)
ETSI RACK (19
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-69
2 - PLANNING

2.3.2
Equipment composition
Tab. 2.42 below shows the composition of the equipment (P/N. 802-300/12) and it is
used to transmit in all the available bands (6-13 GHz).
The AP system can be used in the following configurations:
1+0
1+1 HSBY
1+1
2+0
N+1
The CC system can be used in the following configurations:
Tab. 2.42
2+0
2x(1+1) FD
2x(1+1) Hot Standby
SRA 4 equipment composition (P/N 802-300/12)

Outdoor Assembly
Indoor Assembly
Equipment
(Note)
STM-1 AP
systems
(64 or 128
TCM-4D)
STM-1 CC
systems
(64 or 128
TCM-4D)
ETSI
Rack P/N
IDU
Assembly
P/N
6 GHz
P/N
(6L)
735-211/06B
627-65/002
702-300/12
(6U)
735-211/06C
7 GHz
P/N
8 GHz
P/N
10 GHz
P/N
11 GHz
P/N
13 GHz
P/N
735-201/07
or
735-211/07
735-201/08
735-201/11 735-201/13
or
735-201/10
or
or
735-211/08
735-211/11 735-211/13
735-211/07
735-211/08
(6L)
735-211/06B
627-65/002
702-300/12
735-211/11 735-211/13
(6U)
735-211/06C
Note: The 64 TCM-4D modulation is available in the 6U and 11 GHz bands.

2-70
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.3.3
Indoor assembly composition

The indoor assembly consists of:
Fig. 2.31
an ETSI wired rack;
one IDU assembly in 1+0/1+1/2+0 configuration (refer to Fig. 2.31) or two IDU
assembly in N+1 configuration (refer to Fig. 2.32) or 2x(1+1) (refer to Fig. 2.33),
and one External EOW optional assembly P/N 705-102/01 (refer to Fig. 2.31,
Fig. 2.32 and Fig. 2.33).
1+0/1+1/2+0 Indoor assembly
SRA4 IDU
External EOW
Assembly (optional)
P/N 705-102/01
WIRED RACK
P/N 627-65/002
SRA4 IDU-STM1
External EOW
Assembly (optional)
P/N 705-102/01
WIRED RACK
P/N 627-65/002

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-71
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.32
N+1 Indoor assembly
2+1 CONFIGURATION
IDU MAIN
UNIT
IDU EXT
UNIT
External EOW
Assembly (optional)
P/N 705-102/01
WIRED RACK
P/N 627-65/002
3+1 CONFIGURATION
IDU MAIN
UNIT
IDU EXT
UNIT
External EOW
Assembly (optional)
WIRED RACK
P/N 627-65/002

2-72
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.33
2x(1+1) FD CC Indoor assembly
2x(1+1) CONFIGURATION
1st (1+1) IDU assembly

CH1+CH2 V-pol.
2nd (1+1) IDU assembly

CH1+CH2 H-pol.
External EOW
Assembly (optional)
P/N 705-102/01
WIRED RACK
P/N 627-65/002
Fig. 2.34
2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC Indoor assembly
2x(1+1) CONFIGURATION
1st (1+1) IDU assembly

Main+Stby V-pol.
2nd (1+1) IDU assembly

Main+Stby H-pol.
External EOW
Assembly (optional)
P/N 705-102/01
WIRED RACK
P/N 627-65/002

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-73
2 - PLANNING

2.3.3.1
IDU equipment as a function of the configurations

The system can assume the configurations (System Types) listed in Tab. 2.43. All the
configurations are without MST.
In Tab. 2.44 the indoor assembly composition is set down according to the configuration
(1, 2, ... 6) listed in Tab. 2.43. Tab. 2.47 to Tab. 2.51 show the indoor assembly
composition.
In Tab. 2.45 the indoor assembly composition is set down according to the configuration
(7, 8, 9 and 10) listed in Tab. 2.43. Tab. 2.57 to Tab. 2.58 show the indoor assembly
composition.
In Tab. 2.46 the indoor assembly composition is set down according to configuration 11
listed in Tab. 2.43. Tab. 2.59 to Tab. 2.60 show the indoor assembly composition.
Tab. 2.43
System types
System
Type
Denomination
1+0 1)
1+1 Hot Standby Terminal, STI (Single Tributary Interface) 1) 2)
1+1 Hot Standby Terminal, DTI (Dual Tributary Interface) 3)
1+1 Frequency Diversity Terminal, STI (Single Tributary Interface) 1) 2)
1+1 Frequency Diversity Terminal, DTI (Dual Tributary Interface) 3)
2+0 1)
2x(1+1) Frequency Diversity Terminal, STI (Single Tributary Interface) 2)
2x(1+1) Frequency Diversity Terminal, DTI (Dual Tributary Interface) 3)
2x(1+1) Hot Standby Terminal, STI (Single Tributary Interface) 2)
10
2x(1+1) Hot Standby Terminal, DTI (Dual Tributary Interface) 3)
11
N+1 Terminal, STI (Single Tributary Interface) 2)
1.
Configuration with SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1.
2.
Configuration without tributary protection.
3.
Configuration with tributary protection.

2-74
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.44
Supported units in system types 1, 2, ... 6

System Types
Ref.
Fig. 2.35
and
Fig. 2.36
Units
BB-MODEM unit
BB-MODEM unit
Controller unit
Alarm restitution unit
Fan unit
Notes:
R = Required
Tab. 2.45
Supported units in system types 7, 8. 9 and 10 (2x(1+1) CC version)

Ref.
Fig. 2.37
Units
(IDU Assembly V(H) Pol.)
1+1
BB-MODEM unit
BB-MODEM unit
Controller unit
Fan unit
Ref.
Fig. 2.37
Units
(IDU Assembly H(V) Pol.)
1+1
BB-MODEM unit
BB-MODEM unit
Controller unit
Fan unit
Notes:
R = Required

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-75
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.46
Supported units in system type 11 (2+1/3+1 version)

Ref.
Fig. 2.38
Units
(IDU MAIN unit)
2+1
3+1
BB-MODEM unit
BB-MODEM unit
Controller unit
Fan unit
2+1
3+1
Ref.
Fig. 2.38
Units
(IDU EXT unit)
BB-MODEM unit
BB-MODEM unit
Controller unit
Fan unit
Notes:
R = Required

2-76
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.3.3.2
Indoor assembly composition (IDU)

The IDU assembly is available in 8 versions according to the configuration (1+0 or
1+1/2+0/2x(1+1)/2+1/3+1) and to the interface (electrical or optical):
1+0 Electrical IDU P/N 702-300/12A

(SRA4 IDU)
1+0 Optical IDU
P/N 702-300/12B
SRA4 IDU
P/N 702-300/12C
1+1/2+0
Electrical IDU
(SRA4 IDU)
1+1/2+0
P/N 702-300/12D
Optical IDU
(SRA4 IDU)
1+0 Electrical IDU P/N 702-300/12F
(SRA4 IDU-STM1)
1+0 Optical IDU
P/N 702-300/12G
(SRA4 IDU-STM1)
1+1/2+0
P/N 702-300/12M
Electrical IDU
(SRA4 IDU-STM1)
1+1/2+0
P/N 702-300/12N
Optical IDU
(SRA4 IDU-STM1)
2x(1+1) Electrical IDU P/N 702-300/12C
(SRA4 IDU)
2x(1+1) Optical IDUP/N 702-300/12D
(SRA4 IDU)
2+1 Electrical IDU P/N 702-300/12C
(SRA4 IDU)
P/N 702-300/12A
2+1 Optical IDU
P/N 702-300/12D
(SRA4 IDU)
P/N 702-300/12B
3+1 Electrical IDU P/N 702-300/12C
(SRA4 IDU)
3+1 Optical IDU
P/N 702-300/12D
(SRA4 IDU)
Q.ty 1
Tab. 2.47
Q.ty 1
Tab. 2.49
Q.ty 1
Tab. 2.48
Q.ty 1
Tab. 2.50
Q.ty 1
Tab. 2.52
Q.ty 1
Tab. 2.54
Q.ty 1
Tab. 2.53
Q.ty 1
Tab. 2.55
Q.ty 2 (IDU V(H) Pol. +

H (V) Pol.
Tab. 2.57
Q.ty 2 (IDU V(H) Pol. +

H (V) Pol.
Tab. 2.58
Q.ty 1 (IDU MAIN)

Q.ty 1 (IDU EXT)
Q.ty 1 (IDU MAIN)
Q.ty 1 (IDU EXT)
Q.ty 2 (IDU MAIN +EXT)
Tab. 2.59
Tab. 2.59
Tab. 2.60
Tab. 2.60
Tab. 2.59
Q.ty 2 (IDU MAIN +EXT)
Tab. 2.60
In the following tables are listed the units present in each version.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-77
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.47
1+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12A)

Ref.
Fig. 2.35
Tab. 2.48
Denomination
BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM)
612-314/07
Cover
224-065/54
Controller unit
634-001/02
Alarm Restitution unit
614-104/66
Fan unit
614-041/17
1+0 Base accessories
597-525/21
1+1/2+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C)

Ref.
Fig. 2.35
Tab. 2.49
Denomination
P/N
612-314/07
612-314/07
Controller unit
634-001/02
614-104/66
Fan unit
614-041/17
597-525/22
1+0 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12B)

Ref.
Fig. 2.35
Tab. 2.50
P/N
Denomination
P/N
BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM)
612-314/06
Cover
224-065/54
Controller unit
634-001/02
614-104/66
Fan unit
614-041/17
597-525/21
1+1/2+0 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12D)

Ref.
Fig. 2.35
Denomination
P/N
612-314/06
612-314/06
Controller unit
634-001/02
614-104/66
Fan unit
614-041/17
597-525/22

2-78
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.51
Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 configuration

Denomination
Fig. 2.35
P/N

or
612-314/07
Connection elements from 1+0 to 1+1
597-525/33
1+0/1+1/2+0 SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly

D
A
CHACHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
612-314/06
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11 G703
S
E
R
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
D
IF
PS
IF
PS

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-79
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.52
1+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12F)

Ref.
Fig. 2.36
Tab. 2.53
Denomination
612-314/65
Cover
332-309/89
Controller unit
634-001/02
614-104/66
Fan unit
614-041/17
597-525/21
1+1/2+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12M)

Ref.
Fig. 2.36
Tab. 2.54
Denomination
P/N
612-314/65
612-314/65
Controller unit
634-001/02
614-104/66
Fan unit
614-041/17
597-525/22
1+0 Optical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12G)

Ref.
Fig. 2.36
Tab. 2.55
P/N
Denomination
P/N
612-314/64
Cover
332-309/89
Controller unit
634-001/02
614-104/66
Fan unit
614-041/17
597-525/21
1+1/2+0 Optical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12F)

Ref.
Fig. 2.36
Denomination
P/N
612-314/64
612-314/64
Controller unit
634-001/02
614-104/66
Fan unit
614-041/17
597-525/22

2-80
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.56
Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 configuration

Denomination
Fig. 2.36
P/N

or
612-314/65
Connection elements from 1+0 to 1+1
597-525/33
612-314/64
1+0/1+1/2+0 SRA4 IDU-STM1 systems Indoor assembly

D

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-81
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.57
2x(1+1) CC Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU V(H) Pol.
and IDU H(V) Pol.)
Ref.
Fig. 2.37
Denomination
P/N
612-314/07
612-314/07
612-314/07
612-314/07
C-H
Controller unit
634-001/02
D-I
614-104/66
E-L
Fan unit
614-041/17
Base accessories (Note 1)
597-525/22
N+1 base accessories (Note 3)
597-525/57
Note 1: Quantity 2
Note 2: These accessories include the cables for the E-link.
Tab. 2.58
2x(1+1) CC Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU V(H) Pol.
and IDU H(V) Pol.)
Ref.
Fig. 2.37
Denomination
P/N
612-314/06
612-314/06
612-314/06
612-314/06
C-H
Controller unit
634-001/02
D-I
614-104/66
E-L
Fan unit
614-041/17
597-525/22
597-525/21
597-525/57
Note 1: Quantity 2
Note 2: These accessories include the cables for the E-link.

2-82
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.37
2x(1+1) CC SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly
A
CHACHB
IDU V(H) Pol.

unit
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
Key
F
A
N
LCT
ODU PWR
ODU CABLE CO-CH
O
ALM In Out I
ALM
Exp. Port
D
IF
PS
IF
PS
CHACHB
IDU H(V) Pol.

unit
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
U
n.
IDU
ODU
ALM
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU PWR
ODU CABLE CO-CH
O
ALM In Out I
ALM
Exp. Port
D
IF
PS
IF
PS

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-83
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.59
2+1/3+1 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU Main and /12A
for IDU EXT.)
Ref.
Fig. 2.38
Denomination
P/N
612-314/07
612-314/07
612-314/07

(for 3+1 only)
612-314/07
C-H
Controller unit
634-001/02
D-I
614-104/66
E-L
Fan unit
614-041/17
597-525/22
597-525/21
597-525/57
Note 1: Quantity 1 for 2+1 and quantity 2 for 3+1.

Note 3: These accessories include the cables for the E-link and B-link.
Tab. 2.60
2+1/3+1 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12D for IDU Main and /12B
for IDU EXT.)
Ref.
Fig. 2.38
Denomination
P/N
612-314/06
612-314/06
612-314/06

(for 3+1 only)
612-314/06
C-H
Controller unit
634-001/02
D-I
614-104/66
E-L
Fan unit
614-041/17
597-525/22
597-525/21
597-525/57

Note 3: These accessories include the cables for the E-link and B-link.

2-84
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.38
N+1 (2+1/3+1) SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly
A
CHACHB
IDU MAIN
unit
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11 G703
S
E
R
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
Key
F
A
N
LCT
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
PS
IF
PS
F
CHACHB
IDU EXT
unit
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
U
n.
IDU
ODU
ALM
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU PWR
ODU CABLE CO-CH
O
ALM In Out I
ALM
Exp. Port
D
IF
PS
IF
PS

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-85
2 - PLANNING

2.3.3.3
Licence fees
The Licence key" (P/N 625-017/64) includes a memory, called "Memory Key",
configured with the Licence required by the Customer. The last digits of the P/N describe
the configurations enabled on the equipment, according to the Tab. 2.61.
Tab. 2.61
Licence key P/Ns

SRA4
IDU
SRA4
IDU
STM1
License fee for STM-1 ND AP
010
License fee for STM-1 HD AP
625-017/64
011
License fee for 2xSTM-1 HD AP
625-017/64
100
License fee for STM-1 ND CC
625-017/64
110
License fee for STM-1 HD CC
625-017/64
111
License fee for 2xSTM-1 HD CC
Base code
Ext.
625-017/64
000
625-017/64
Description
Note: The licence with higher extension code includes also the facility of the licences
with a lower extension code.
2.3.3.4
Upgrading kits for on-field upgrading of the licence types

The "Upgrading kit" (P/N 625-018/14 xxx) includes a "Program Hardware Key",
equipped with Licence Credits.
Tab. 2.62 lists the list of the available upgrading kit.
Tab. 2.62
Upgrading kit P/Ns

Base code
Ext.
Description
625-018/14
100
SW licence upgrading from AP to CC
625-018/14
010
SW licence upgrading from ND to HD

2-86
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.3.4
Outdoor assembly composition (ODU)

ODU is available in 2 versions:
2.3.4.1
ODU AP for AP channelling (Fig. 2.39): par. 2.3.4.1. These ODUs are installed on
the supporting frames of par. 2.3.7.
ODU AP/CC for AP and CC channelling (Fig. 2.40): par. 2.3.4.2. These ODUs are
installed on the supporting frames of par. 2.3.7.
ODU AP
2.3.4.1.1 7 GHz ODU

The ODU composition is shown in Tab. 2.63.
The complete list of the available ODUs is shown in par. 2.2.7.3.
Tab. 2.63
7 GHz - ODU Composition

Made up of:
ODU P/N
(Note 1)
Denomination
Group 7 GHz ODU 128
735-201/07-xxx
Diplexer 7 GHz
(Note 2)
P/N
735-201/07A
527-705/26
527-705/27
527-705/31
527-705/35
527-705/36
527-705/38
Note 1:
The ODU has a 3-digit extension P/N with the following meaning:
1st digit: shows the channeling (shifter) + main/inter.
2nd and 3rd digits: show the RF channel and the mounting of the filter, which differs
according to the operating frequency of the transmitter (lower or higher half-band).
Should the 2nd digit be less than 5 it means that the Transmitter operates on the
lower half-band. Should the 2nd digit be greater or equal to 5 it means that the
Transmitter operates on the higher half-band.
Note 2:
In every ODU is installed a duplexer which has a different P/N according to the RF
channeling (refer to par. 2.2.7.3).

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-87
2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.1.2 8 GHz ODU
Tab. 2.64

ODU P/N
(Note 1)
Made up of:
Denomination
Group 8 GHz ODU 128
Diplexer 8 GHz
(Note 2)
P/N
735-201/08A
527-705/61
527-705/62
527-705/66
527-705/67
527-705/70
527-705/71
527-705/73
527-705/74
735-201/08-xxx
Note 1:
Note 2:

2-88
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.1.3 10 GHz ODU
Tab. 2.65
10 GHz - ODU composition

Made up of:
ODU P/N
(Note 1)
Denomination
Group 10 GHz ODU 128
Tx lower half-band
or
735-201/10-xxx

Tx higher half-band
Duplexer 10 GHz
(Nota 2)
P/N
735-201/10L
oppure
735-201/10H
527-904/92
Note 1:
2nd digit: differs according to the operating frequency of the transmitter (0 for lower
half-band or 1 for higher half-band)
3rd digit: duplexer filter on the lower part of the half-band (0) or on the higher part
of the half-band (1).
The complete list of the available ODUs is shown in par. 2.2.7.5
Note 2:
In every ODU is installed a duplexer which has a different 3-digit extension P/N
according to the RF channeling (refer to par. 2.2.7.5).

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-89
2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.1.4 11 GHz ODU
Tab. 2.66

Made up of:
ODU P/N
(Note 1)
Denomination
Tx lower half-band
or
735-201/11-xxx
P/N
735-201/11L
or

Tx higher half-band
Duplexer 11 GHz
(Note 2)
735-201/11H
527-904/84
Note 1:
Note 2:

2-90
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.1.5 13 GHz ODU
Tab. 2.67

Made up of:
ODU P/N
(Note 1)
Denomination
13 GHz ODU 128 group
735-201/13-xxx
13 GHz Duplexer
(Note 2)
P/N
735-201/13A
527-904/74
Note 1:
Note 2:

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-91
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.39
Outdoor assembly (AP)

FRONT VIEW
FEEDER FLANGE
RX FIELD
MEASUREMENT
CONNECTOR
PC INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
(factory use)
GROUND CABLE
IN/OUT IF CABLE
CONNECTOR
TOP VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW

2-92
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.2
ODU AP/CC
2.3.4.2.1 ODU 6 GHz

Tab. 2.68

Made up of:
ODU P/N
(Note 1)
Denomination
Group 6 GHz ODU 128
Tx lower half-band (6L)
or
735-211/06-xxx
P/N
735-211/06
or
Group 6 GHz ODU 128

Tx higher half-band (6U)
735-211/06
Duplexer 6 GHz
(6L)
527-703/57
or
Duplexer 6 GHz
(6U)
or
527-703/58
(Note 2)
Note 1:
The complete list of the available ODUs is shown in par. 2.2.7.1 and par. 2.2.7.2
Note 2:
according to the RF channeling (refer to par. 2.2.7.1 and par. 2.2.7.2).

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-93
2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.2.2 7 GHz ODU
Tab. 2.69

ODU P/N
(Note 1)
Made up of:
Denomination
Group 7 GHz ODU 128
735-211/07-xxx
Diplexer 7 GHz
(Note 2)
P/N
735-211/07A
527-705/26
527-705/27
527-705/31
527-705/35
527-705/36
527-705/38
Note 1:
Note 2:

2-94
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.2.3 8 GHz ODU
Tab. 2.70

Made up of:
ODU P/N
(Note 1)
Denomination
Group 8 GHz ODU 128
Diplexer 8 GHz
(Note 2)
735-211/08-xxx
P/N
735-211/08A
527-705/61
527-705/62
527-705/65
527-705/66
527-705/67
527-705/70
527-705/71
527-705/73
527-705/74
Note 1:
Note 2:

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-95
2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.2.4 11 GHz ODU
Tab. 2.71

Made up of:
ODU P/N
(Note 1)
Denomination
Tx lower half-band
or
735-211/11-xxx
P/N
735-211/11L
or

Tx higher half-band
Duplexer 11 GHz
(Note 2)
735-211/11H
527-904/84
Note 1:
Note 2:

2-96
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.2.5 13 GHz ODU
Tab. 2.72

Made up of:
ODU P/N
(Note 1)
Denomination
13 GHz ODU 128 group
735-211/13-xxx
13 GHz Duplexer
(Note 2)
P/N
735-211/13A
527-904/74
Note 1:
Note 2:

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-97
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.40
Outdoor assembly (AP/CC )

FRONT VIEW
367
FEEDER FLANGE
GROUND CABLE
CONNECTION POINT
RX FIELD
MEASUREMENT
CONNECTOR
PC INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
(factory use)
202
RF LO CO-CHANNEL
CONNECTOR
324
RF LO CO-CHANNEL
CONNECTOR
TOP VIEW
IN/OUT IF CABLE
CONNECTOR
BOTTOM VIEW
In the 6 GHz ODU connector IF LO CO-CHANNEL is not used, because in Rx

side the conversion is directly from RF to 140 MHz.

2-98
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.3.5
IDU/ODU cable
Two different types of cable can be used:
3/10 50 ohm coaxial cable
refer to par. 2.3.5.1
refer to par. 2.3.5.2
The standard delivery includes the 3/10 coaxial cable and the max. length of the
IDU/ODU connection is 190 m.
The 1/4 coaxial cable is delivered on demand and the max. length of the IDU/ODU
connection is 250 m.
2.3.5.1

Refer to Fig. 2.41.
The 3/10 coaxial cable can be produced by two different manufacturers (Andrew and
Intercond).
Tab. 2.73
Andrew cable set

P/N
Tab. 2.74
Description
104-009/50
3/10 CNT300 - 50 ohm coaxial cable
597-525/78A
3/10 Braided coax cable accessories
Q.ty
421-008/38
coax N-plug
421-008/35
90 coax N-plug
333-031/21
grounding kit
Intercond cable set

P/N
104-009/51
597-525/78B
Description
Q.ty
CF 3/10l3 ICN48 - 50 ohm coaxial cable

3/10 Braided coax cable accessories
421-008/39
coax N-plug
421-008/36
90 coax N-plug
333-021/22
grounding kit

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-99
2 - PLANNING

2.3.5.2

Refer to Fig. 2.41.
Tab. 2.75
Andrew cable set

P/N
104-009/42
597-523/94A
Description
Q.ty
1/4 LDF1RN - 50 ohm coaxial cable

1/4 coax cable accessories
L1PNM-HC
N type coax plug
421-008/88
L1PNR-HC
90 N type coax N-plug
421-008/84
CSGL1-10B2
grounding kit
333-031/19

2-100
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.41
3/10 or 1/4 coaxial cable
(a)
OSM/N COAXIAL TAIL

(L.=1 Mt.)
(314-327/91)
TO ODU
SECTION
3/10 or 1/4
COAXIAL CABLE
COAXIAL N-PLUG
(b)
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING BRACKET
(232-124/20)
(a)
OSM/N COAXIAL TAIL

(L.=1 Mt.)
(314-327/91)
TO IDU
SECTION
(a) = This material is included in the base connection elements (1+0) 597-525/21, (1+1) 597-525/22 or (1+0>1+1)
597-525/33.
(b) = This material is included in the fixing accessories 332-011/35, included in the base connection element 597-525/21
and 597-525/22.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-101
2 - PLANNING

2.3.6
ODU coaxial connections for the CO-CHANNEL

Cable connections between two ODU's must be realised only when the equipment is CC
configured: 2+0 CC, 2x(1+1) FD CC or 2x(1+1) HSBY CC.
2.3.6.1
2+0 CC configuration connections

The connections must be made as specified in Fig. 2.42.
Fig. 2.42
Connection diagram between the AP/CC ODUs for CC configuration

FLEX WG
FLEX WG
ODU 1
V
H
ODU 2
RF LO COAX CABLE
RF LO Conn.
IF LO Conn.
IF
COAX CABLE
TO/FROM
IDU
RF LO Conn.
IF LO COAX CABLE
(Note)
IF LO Conn.
IF
COAX CABLE
TO/FROM
IDU
Note: This connection is not implemented in the 6 GHz AP/CC ODU.

2-102
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.43
Connection diagram between the ODUs
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
Antenna
side
ODU
AP/CC 1
TOP VIEW
Antenna
side
Antenna
side
ODU
AP/CC 2
TOP VIEW
RF LO coaxial cable
ODU
AP/CC 1
BOTTOM VIEW
Antenna
side
ODU
AP/CC 2
BOTTOM VIEW
Note: This connection is not implemented in the 6 GHz ODU.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-103
2 - PLANNING

2.3.6.2
2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with one antenna)

Fig. 2.44
Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration (2x(1+1) FD with

one antenna)
Flexible W.G.
ODU 3
(CH1)
ODU 1
(CH1)
V pol.
RF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable
H pol.
RF LO
Conn.
RF LO
Conn.
IF LO
Conn.
RF
HYBRID
V
H
IF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable (Note)
IF LO
Conn.
IF
Coax
Cable
ODU 2
(CH2)
V pol.
IF
Coax
Cable
RF
HYBRID
Flexible W.G.
ODU 4
(CH2)
H pol.
RF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable
IF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable (Note)
IF
Coax
Cable
BB.1
XPIC
Connections
BB.2
XPIC
Connections
IF
Coax
Cable
1st IDU
(1+1)
BB.1
XPIC
Connections
BB.2
XPIC
Connections
IF
Coax
Cable
IF
Coax
Cable
2nd IDU
(1+1)

2-104
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.45
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF HYBR.
V Pol.
SIDE
RF HYBR.
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 3
TOP SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 1
TOP SIDE VIEW
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF HYBR.
V Pol.
SIDE
RF HYBR.
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
TOP SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 4
TOP SIDE VIEW
1st (1+1) ODU system
2nd (1+1) ODU system

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-105
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.46
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)
RF LO coaxial cable
RF HYBR.
V Pol.
SIDE
RF HYBR.
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 3
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 1
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
RF LO coaxial cable
RF HYBR.
V Pol.
SIDE
RF HYBR.
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 4
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
2nd (1+1) ODU system

2-106
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.3.6.3
2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with two antennas)

Fig. 2.47
Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration (2x(1+1) FD with two
antennas)
Flexible W.G.
1st System
V
H
Flexible W.G.
ODU 3
(CH1)
ODU 1
(CH1)
RF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable
V-pol.
RF LO
Conn.
IF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable (note)
IF LO
Conn.
H-pol.
RF LO
Conn.
IF LO
Conn.
IF
Coax
Cable
IF
Coax
Cable
Flexible W.G.
2nd System
H
V
Flexible W.G.
ODU 3
(CH2)
ODU 2
(CH2)
RF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable
H-pol.
RF LO
Conn.
IF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable (note)
IF LO
Conn.
IF
Coax
Cable
BB.1
XPIC
Connections
BB.2
XPIC
Connections
V-pol.
RF LO
Conn.
IF LO
Conn.
IF
Coax
Cable
st IDU
1+1)
IF
Coax
Cable
BB.1
XPIC
Connections
BB.2
XPIC
Connections
IF
Coax
Cable
nd IDU
1+1)

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-107
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.48
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF C.P. Filter
V Pol.
SIDE
RF C.P. Filter
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 1
TOP SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 3
TOP SIDE VIEW
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF C.P. Filter
H Pol.
SIDE
RF C.P. Filter
V Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
TOP SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 4
TOP SIDE VIEW
2 nd (1+1) ODU system

2-108
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.49
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)
RF LO coaxial cable
RF C.P. Filter
V Pol.
SIDE
RF C.P. Filter
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 1
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 3
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
RF LO coaxial cable
RF C.P. Filter
H Pol.
SIDE
RF C.P. Filter
V Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 4
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-109
2 - PLANNING

2.3.6.4
2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration connections

Fig. 2.50
Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration (2x(1+1) Hot

Standby)
Flexible W.G.
V
H
ODU 3
(MAIN
ODU 1
(MAIN)
RF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable
V pol.
H pol.
RF LO
Conn.
RF LO
Conn.
IF LO
Conn.
IF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable (Note)
IF LO
Conn.
IF
Coax
Cable
IF
Coax
Cable
RF
COUPLER
ODU 2
(STBY)
V pol.
Flexible W.G.
RF
COUPLER
ODU 4
(CH2)
STBY
RF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable
IF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable (Note)
IF
Coax
Cable
BB.1
XPIC
Connections
BB.2
XPIC
Connections
IF
Coax
Cable
1st IDU
(1+1)
BB.1
XPIC
Connections
BB.2
XPIC
Connections
IF
Coax
Cable
IF
Coax
Cable
2nd IDU
(1+1)

2-110
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.51
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby)
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF COUPLER
V Pol.
SIDE
RF COUPLER
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 3
TOP SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 1
TOP SIDE VIEW
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF COUPLER
V Pol.
SIDE
RF COUPLER
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
TOP SIDE VIEW
1st (1+1) HSBYODU system
AP/CC ODU 4
TOP SIDE VIEW
2nd (1+1) HSBY ODU system

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-111
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.52
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby)
RF LO coaxial cable
RF COUPLER
V Pol.
SIDE
RF COUPLER
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 3
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 1
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
RF LO coaxial cable
RF COUPLER
H Pol.
SIDE
RF COUPLER
V Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 4
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW

2-112
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.3.7
Supporting frames (AP and AP/CC ODU)
2.3.7.1
1+0 Supporting frame

Refer to Fig. 2.53, Fig. 2.54 and Tab. 2.76.
The 1+0 supporting frame consists of a mechanical structure, and relevant waveguide
accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the Outdoor Unit in 1+0 configuration.
From an electrical point of view the frame is a passive device (i.e. waveguide section)
that provides interconnection between its two ports with negligible insertion loss.
Fig. 2.53
ODU
waveguide
Tab. 2.76
Frame
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B
Flange
type
534-114/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6 - 7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-114/07
AP or AP/CC
7.1 - 7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-114/07
AP or AP/CC
8.2 - 8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-114/10
10
AP
10.0 - 11.7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-114/11
11
AP or AP/CC
10.7 - 11.7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-114/13
13
AP or AP/CC
12.7 - 13.3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-113
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.54
POLE 115 mm
1+0 FRAME
ODU

2-114
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.2
1+1 Supporting frames for Hot stand-by
2.3.7.2.1 Balanced frame

The 1+1 supporting frame for Hot Stand-by consists of a mechanical structure, and
relevant waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the two Outdoor
Units in 1+1 HSBY (Hot Stand-by) balanced configuration.
From an electrical point of view the 1+1 frame for balanced configuration is a 1:1
coupler. The signal incoming from the antenna port is split balanced-wise toward the two
ODUs.
Fig. 2.55
1+1 Balanced supporting frame for Hot Standby
ODU
A
C
ODU
Tab. 2.77
Hybrid
Frame
1+1 Balanced supporting frame for Hot Standby
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B,C
Flange
type
534-113/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6 - 7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-113/07
AP or AP/CC
7.1 - 7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-113/07
AP or AP/CC
8.2 - 8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-113/10
10
AP
10.0 - 11.7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-113/11
11
AP or AP/CC
10.7 - 11.7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-113/13
13
AP or AP/CC
12.7 - 13.3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-115
2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.2.2 Unbalanced frame
The 1+1 supporting frame for Hot Stand-by consists of a mechanical structure, and
relevant waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the two Outdoor
Units in 1+1 HSBY (Hot Stand-by) unbalanced configuration.
From an electrical point of view the 1+1 frame for unbalanced configuration is a 10:1
coupler. The signal incoming from the antenna port is split unbalanced-wise the two
ODUs.
Fig. 2.56
1+1 Supporting unbalanced frame for Hot Standby
ODU
A
C
ODU
Tab. 2.78
Coupler
Frame
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B,C
Flange
type
534-112/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6 - 7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-112/07
AP or AP/CC
7.1 - 7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-112/07
AP or AP/CC
8.2 - 8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-112/10
10
AP
10.0 - 11.7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-112/11
11
AP or AP/CC
10.7 - 11.7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-112/13
13
AP or AP/CC
12.7 - 13.3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120

2-116
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.57
POLE 115 mm
1+1 FRAME
ODU
ODU

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-117
2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.3
1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity

The 1+1 supporting frame from frequency diversity consists of a mechanical structure,
and relevant waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of two Outdoor
Units in 1+1 Frequency Diversity configuration.
The two ODUs are interconnected to the antenna port through a circulator. Both the
ODUs transmit at the same time, delivering the signal on two RF channels at different
frequecies on the same polarisation (Co-polar) or on different polarisation (Cross-polar).
Fig. 2.58
1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar)
ODU
A
C
ODU
Tab. 2.79
Circulator
Frame
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
534-115/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
534-115/07
534-115/07
Guide type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B,C
Flange
type
5.6-7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
AP or AP/CC
7.1-7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
AP or AP/CC
8.2-8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84

2-118
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.59
1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Cross-polar)
ODU
B
A1
A2
C
ODU
Tab. 2.80
Frame
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Ports A1, A2
Flange
type
Ports B, C
Flange
type
534-116/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6 - 7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-116/07
AP or AP/CC
7.1 - 7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-116/07
AP or AP/CC
8.2 - 8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-116/11
11
AP or AP/CC
10.7 - 11.7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-116/13
13
AP or AP/CC
12.7 - 13.3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-119
2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.4
Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)

(6U/6L, 7 and 8 GHz)
2.3.7.4.1 Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)
Refer to Fig. 2.60, Tab. 2.81 and Tab. 2.82.
The 2+1 configuration needs two supporting frames:
Fig. 2.60
one 1+0 supporting frame (ref. to par. 2.3.7.1 and Fig. 2.54).
one 1+1 supporting frame for Frequency Diversity (Co-polar) ref. to par. 2.3.7.3.
Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)

C
1+1 FD co-polar frame
1st ODU
A
B
2nd ODU
Frame
Circulator
1+0 frame
B
3th ODU
waveguide
Tab. 2.81
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B
Flange
type
534-114/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5,6 - 7,1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-114/07
AP or AP/CC
7,1 - 7,9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-114/07
AP or AP/CC
8,2 - 8,5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
Tab. 2.82
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
Guide type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B,C
Flange
type
534-115/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6-7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-115/07
AP or AP/CC
7.1-7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-115/07
AP or AP/CC
8.2-8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84

2-120
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

Refer to Fig. 2.61 and Tab. 2.83.
The 3+1 configuration needs two supporting frames for Frequency Diversity (Co-polar)
(ref. to par. 2.3.7.3)
Fig. 2.61

C
1 ODU
st
A
B
2nd ODU
Frame
Circulator
3th ODU
A
B
Circulator
4th ODU
Tab. 2.83
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
Guide type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B,C
Flange
type
534-115/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6-7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-115/07
AP or AP/CC
7.1-7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-115/07
AP or AP/CC
8.2-8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-121
2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.5
Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)

(10, 11 and 13 GHz)
Refer to Fig. 2.62, Tab. 2.84 and Tab. 2.85.
The 2+1 configuration needs two supporting frames as follow:
Fig. 2.62
one 1+0 supporting frame (ref. to par. 2.3.7.1 and Fig. 2.54)..
one 1+1 balanced supporting frame (the same used for Hot-Standby ref. to
par. 2.3.7.2.1 and Fig. 2.57)

C
1+1 Balanced supporting frame
1st ODU
A
B
Frame
Hybrid
2nd ODU
1+0 supporting frame

B
3th ODU
waveguide
Tab. 2.84
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B
Flange
type
534-114/10
10
AP
10,0 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-114/11
11
AP or AP/CC
10,7 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-114/13
13
AP or AP/CC
12,7 - 13,3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120
Tab. 2.85
Code
Freq.
Band (GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range (GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange type
Port B,C
Flange type
534-113/10
10
AP
10,0 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-113/11
11
AP or AP/CC
10,7 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-113/13
13
AP or AP/CC
12,7 - 13,3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120

2-122
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

The 3+1 configuration needs two 1+1 balanced supporting frames (the same used for
Hot-Standby - ref. to par. 2.3.7.2.1 and Fig. 2.57)
Fig. 2.63

C
1st ODU
A
B
Hybrid
2nd ODU
C
Frame
3th ODU
A
B
Hybrid
4th ODU
Tab. 2.86
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range (GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange type
Port B,C
Flange type
534-113/10
10
AP
10,0 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-113/11
11
AP or AP/CC
10,7 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-113/13
13
AP or AP/CC
12,7 - 13,3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-123
2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.6
Supporting frames for Co-Channel FD configuration
2.3.7.6.1 Supporting frames for (2+0) Co-Channel FD configuration

The 2+0 configuration needs two 1+0 supporting frames (ref. to par. 2.3.7.1 and
Fig. 2.54).
Fig. 2.64
Supporting frames for (2+0) Co-Channel FD configuration

A
ODU
Frame
waveguide

B
ODU
waveguide
Tab. 2.87
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B
Flange
type
534-114/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5,6 - 7,1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-114/07
AP/CC
7,1 - 7,9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-114/07
AP/CC
8,2 - 8,5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-114/11
11
AP/CC
10,7 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-114/13
13
AP/CC
12,7 - 13,3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120

2-124
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.6.2 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with
one antenna) - ODU 6L/6U, 7 and 8 GHz
The 2x(1+1) configuration needs two supporting frames for Frequency Diversity
(Co-polar) (ref. to par. 2.3.7.3)
Fig. 2.65
Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna)

C
1st ODU

A
2nd ODU
Frame
Circulator
3th ODU
A
B
Circulator
4th ODU
Tab. 2.88
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
534-115/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
534-115/07
534-115/07
Guide type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B,C
Flange
type
5.6-7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
AP/CC
7.1-7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
AP/CC
8.2-8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-125
2 - PLANNING

one antenna) - ODU 11 GHz and 13 GHz
The 2x(1+1) configuration needs two 1+1 balanced supporting frames (the same used
for Hot-Standby - ref. to par. 2.3.7.2.1 and Fig. 2.57)
Fig. 2.66
Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna)

C
1st ODU
A
B
Hybrid
2nd ODU
C
Frame
3th ODU
A
B
Hybrid
4th ODU
Tab. 2.89
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range (GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange type
Port B,C
Flange type
534-113/11
11
AP/CC
10,7 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-113/13
13
AP/CC
12,7 - 13,3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120

2-126
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

two antennas)
The 2x(1+1) configuration need two supporting frames for Frequency Diversity
(Cross-polar) (ref. to par. 2.3.7.5.)
Fig. 2.67
Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with two antennas)
1st ODU
B
A1
1+1 FD
cross-polar
frame
A2
3th ODU
2nd ODU
B
A1
1+1 FD
cross-polar
frame
A2
4th ODU
Frame

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-127
2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.90
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Ports A1, A2
Flange
type
Ports B, C
Flange
type
534-116/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5,6 - 7,1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-116/07
AP/CC
7,1 - 7,9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-116/07
AP/CC
8,2 - 8,5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-116/11
11
AP/CC
10,7 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-116/13
13
AP/CC
12,7 - 13,3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120

2-128
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.7
Supporting frames for Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration
2.3.7.7.1 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel Hot Standby

configuration - ODU 6, 7, 8, 11 and 13 GHz
The 2x(1+1) configuration needs two 1+1 unbalanced supporting frames - ref. to
par. 2.3.7.2.2 and Fig. 2.57)
Fig. 2.68
Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration

B
1+1 Unbalanced supporting frame
1st ODU
A
C
Coupler
2nd ODU
B
Frame
1+1 Unbalanced supporting frame
3th ODU
A
C
Coupler
4th ODU
Tab. 2.91
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B,C
Flange
type
534-112/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6 - 7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-112/07
AP/CC
7.1 - 7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-112/07
AP/CC
8.2 - 8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-112/11
11
AP/CC
10.7 - 11.7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-112/13
13
AP/CC
12.7 - 13.3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
2-129
2 - PLANNING
LA
PA
G
E

2-130
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF THE RACK ETSI
3.1.1
View of the rack ETSI

Fig. 3.1 shows the rack ETSI with the relevant overall dimensions, Fig. 3.2 shows the
general dimensions for the operation and Tab. 3.1 lists the types of rack ETSI. The
weight of the empty rack is approximately 57 Kg.
The dimensions are pointed out by means of millimeters.
Fig. 3.1
View of the rack ETSI with overall dimensions

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-1
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.2
General dimensions for the rack ETSI operation

3-2
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Tab. 3.1
Rack ETSI list

CODE
HEIGHT
mm
COLOUR
CABLE SUPPORT AND

OPTICAL FIBER DUCT
301-021/01
2200
Grey RAL 7001
NO
301-021/02
2200
Sand RAL 7032
NO
301-021/31
1800
Sand RAL 7032
NO
627-65/001
2200
Grey RAL 7001
NO
627-65/002
2200
Sand RAL 7032
NO
627-65/003
2200
Sand RAL 7032
NO (*)
627-65/005
1800
Sand RAL 7032
NO
627-65/011
2200
Grey RAL 7001
YES
627-65/012
2200
Sand RAL 7032
YES
(*) = Provided only with SRT 1C (it is a version equipped with support and protection of
the antenna circulators).
3.1.2
3.1.2.1
Drilling planes
In-line installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame
Fig. 3.3 and Fig. 3.4 show the fixing of the rack upper and lower parts.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-3
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.3
Fixing of the lower part: floor drilling plane
Key:
1.
Rack ETSI
2.
Floor hole 14mm
3.
N 2 self-locking blocks M8 (code 203-360/04) provided into the fixing kit

(333-043/81), for the installation procedure refer to Fig. 3.10
4.
The pipe wrench with size 13mm has to be provided by the installation operator
* = Act on the levelling groups through an hexagonal bar wrench with size 6 mm to get
the angular adjustment of the rack.

3-4
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.4
Fixing of the upper part
Key:
1.
Rack ETSI
2.
Eyebolt (Standard) to be removed
3.
N 2 fixing plates (code 224-015/64) provided into the fixing kit (333-043/81)
4.
N 4 hexagonal head screws M10x30 (code 203-346/18D) provided into the fixing
kit (333-043/81)
5.
N 4 flat washers
(333-043/81)
6.
The pipe wrench with size 1719 mm has to be provided by the installation
operator.
10,5 (cod. 207-510/13D) provided into the fixing kit

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-5
3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.2
Back-to-back installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame

Fig. 3.5 e Fig. 3.6 show the fixing of the rack upper and lower parts.
Fig. 3.5
Key:
1.
Rack ETSI
2.
Floor hole 14mm
3.
N 2 self-locking blocks M8 (code 203-360/04) provided into the fixing kit

(333-043/81), for the installation procedure refer to Fig. 3.8
4.
The pipe wrench with size 13mm has to be provided by the installation operator
* = Act on the levelling groups through an hexagonal bar wrench with size 6 mm to get
the angular adjustment of the rack.

3-6
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.6
Fixing of the upper part
Key:
1.
Rack ETSI
2.
Eyebolt (Standard) to be removed
3.
N 2 fixing plates (code 224-015/64) provided into the fixing kit (333-043/81)
4.
kit (333-043/81)
5.
N 4 flat washers
(333-043/81)
6.
operator.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-7
3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.3
Wall installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame

Fig. 3.7 show the fixing of the rack upper part.
Fig. 3.7
Do not fix the rack one each other in their upper part by means of the plates (code
224-015/64)
Key:
1.
Rack ETSI
2.
N 2 wall fixing plates (code 232-334/77) provided into the fixing kit (333-043/81)
3.
N 2 flat washers
(333-043/81)
4.
kit (333-043/81)
5.
operator
6.
Floor hole 9 mm
7.
N 2 expandable blocks M5 (cod. 165-010/08) provided into the fixing kit

(333-043/81)
8.
The medium screwdriver has to be provided by the installation operator.

3-8
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.4
In-line installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame on

floating floor or on wall
Fig. 3.8 shows the drilling plane for the fixing of the Racks.
The drilling point corresponding to the elliptic hole present on the fixing bracket depends
on the position where it is installed the rack.
The fixing material is an optional one and it has to be provided separately (refer to
Tab. 3.2 and Tab. 3.3).
Fig. 3.8
Drilling plane for the in-line fixing of the Rack ETSI on floating floor and on wall

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-9
3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.5
Back-to-back installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame

on floating floor
Fig. 3.9 shows the drilling plane for the fixing of the Racks.
The fixing material is an optional one and it has to be provided separately (refer to
Tab. 3.2 and Tab. 3.3).
Fig. 3.9
Drilling plane for the back-to-back fixing of the Rack ETSI on floating floor

3-10
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.6
Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolts

for floors
Fig. 3.10 shows the characteristics of the bolt and the corresponding installation
procedure.
N 2 of these bolts are provided with the fixing kit for the rack ETSI (333-043/81).
Fig. 3.10
Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolt for floor

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-11
3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.7
Characteristics and installation procedure of the expansion bolts

for walls
Fig. 3.11 shows the characteristics of the bolt and the corresponding installation
procedure.
N 2 of these bolts are provided with the fixing kit for the rack ETSI (333-043/81).
Fig. 3.11
Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolt for walls

3-12
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.3
3.1.3.1
Connections
Ground connections for the rack ETSI
Fig. 3.12 shows the ground connections relevant to the rack ETSI that have to be
realized.
Fig. 3.12
Ground connections of the Rack ETSI
* = This ground cable is comprised into the ETSI rack (627-65/003)

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-13
3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.4
Composition of the fixing kit

Tab. 3.2 and Tab. 3.3 lists the fixing materials for racks ETSI.
Tab. 3.2
Tab. 3.3
Fixing kit for racks ETSI (333-043/81)

OPTION
CODE
1.
203-360/04
2.
DESCRIPTION
M.U.
Q.TY
SELF-LOCKING BOLTSM8
Nr.
165-010/04
EXPANSION BOLTS M5
Nr.
3.
224-015/64
FIXING PLATE
Nr.
4.
203-346/18D
HEXAGONAL HEAD SCREWS M10x30
Nr.
5.
207-510/13D
FLAT WASHERS 10,5
Nr.
6.
232-334/77
PLATE FOR WALL FIXING
Nr.
7.
147-016/02
ANTI-STATIC ENVELOPE
Nr.
8.
147-101/12
PAPERBOARD BOX
Nr.
M.U.
Q.TY
Fixing kit for racks ETSI for floating floors (Optional) (332-309/36)
OPTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
1.
205-451/82
STAINLESS STEEL TIE ROD M8
Nr.
2.
224-303/25
ANCHORING BRACKET
Nr.
3.
206-702/15D
NUT M8
Nr.
4.
207-505/12D
FLAT WASHER
Nr.
5.
207-501/12D
SPRING WASHER
Nr.
For the installation of the Racks ETSI on wooden floors, use n 2 screws M8x45; for the
wall fixing, use wooden screws M5x25 to be bought on site.

3-14
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
The equipment is made up by a BB assembly (IDU) that is housed into a ETSI type rack
and by a transceiver (ODU) that is inserted into a box to be installed outdoor near the
antenna.
This paragraph contains the information necessary to make easier on site the
installation procedures of the BB assembly (and eventually of the Q-Adapter unit if
equipped) and of the power supply distribution panel inside the ETSI rack. It provides
also the installation instructions of the ODU on the outdoor pole support (with or without
antenna).
3.2.1
IDU installation in the ETSI rack

Insert the cage nuts into the square slots of the rack, on the desired positions.
Fix the sub-rack by means of four screws M6x16.
Connect the coaxial cables as pointed out into the par. 3.4 "EXTERNAL
CONNECTIONS".
The connection cables with the ODU are housed along the side wall of the rack.
3.2.2
3.2.2.1
ODU
General
In this paragraph all the operations are described, required for the mechanical
installation of equipments.
During the installation, while lifting the antenna and/or the outdoor pole
supporting frame, it is strictly forbidden to stand or transit in the area below; the
area has to be suitably delimited or signaled according to regulations in force.
For the operations to be realized outside on antenna, frame, ODU, all the required
safeties, according to the regulations in force, against accidental falls of the
operators have to be observed like the presence ot railings, safety bolts, etc.
To lift the ODU use only the eyebolt shown in Fig. 3.13.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-15
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.2.2
ODU Layout
Fig. 3.13 shows the ODU (AP) (front view and top view). In the top view it is possible to
see the connectors for the Rx field measurement and for the PC interface and the
eyebolt which must be used to lift and to move the ODU. The eyebolt can be used also
ax fixing point of the connection for the ground cable. The bottom view allows to see the
IN/OUT connector of the IF cable.
Fig. 3.13 shows the ODU (AP/CC) (front view and top view). In the top view it is possible
to see the connectors for the Rx field measurement for the PC interface and IF-LO
synch. co-channel connections. The bottom view allows to see the IN/OUT connector of
the IF cable and RF-LO synch. co-channel connections.
3.2.2.3
ODU flanges
Tab. 3.4
ODU Flanges
Frequency bands
(GHz)
Flange
6 (5.9 - 7.1)
UDR 70
7 (7.1 - 7.9)
UDR 84
8 (8.2 - 8.5)
UDR 84
10 (10.0 - 11.7)
UDR 100
11 (10.7 - 11.7)
UDR 100
13 (12.7 - 13.3)
UDR 120

3-16
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.13
ODU (AP) layout

EYEBOLT
PC INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
(factory use)
RX FIELD MEASUREMENT
CONNECTOR
TOP VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
IN/OUT CABLE
CONNECTOR

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-17
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.14
ODU (AP/CC) Layout
RX FIELD MEASUREMENT
CONNECTOR
PC INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
(factory use)
IN/OUT CABLE
CONNECTOR
IF-LO
CO-CHANNEL SYNC
CONNECTOR
(Note)
TOP VIEW
RF-LO
CO-CHANNEL SYNC
CONNECTOR
BOTTOM VIEW
Note: in the 6 GHz ODU this connector is not used (a cover is present).

3-18
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.3
1+0 FRAME INSTALLATION
This informations are valid for AP and AP/CC ODUs
To install the 1+0 frame fix it to the pole by using the two bracket and relevant nuts and
lock nuts as shown in Fig. 3.15.
Remove the protection cover shown in Fig. 3.16, and insert the O-rings.
Install the ODU on the support frame as shown in Fig. 3.17 and tighten the four fixing
screws.
Fig. 3.19 shows the ODU installed on the frame in 1+0 configuration.
3.2.3.1
1+0 Frame - P/N and flanges
Tab. 3.5
1+0 frame - P/N and flanges

RF FREQUENCY BAND
(GHz)
1+0 FRAME
P/N
TYPE OF FLANGE
(to Antenna)
6L-6U
534-114/06
UDR 70
534-114/07
UDR 84
534-114/07
UDR 84
10
534-114/10
UDR 100
11
534-114/11
UDR 100
13
534-114/13
UDR 120

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-19
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.15
1+0 frame - Pole fixing
POLE 115 mm
1+0 FRAME

3-20
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.16
1+0 frame - O-Rings
COVER
O-RING
O-RINGS
COVER
(*) - THE O-RINGS ARE DELIVERED WITH THE FRAME

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-21
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.17
1+0 frame - ODU installation
FIXING SCREWS
ODU

3-22
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.18
1+0 frame - installed ODU

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-23
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.4
1+1 frame installation
This informations are valid for AP and AP/CC ODUs

To install the 1+1 frame fix it to the pole by using the two bracket and relevant nuts and
lock nuts as shown in Fig. 3.19.
Remove the protection cover shown in Fig. 3.20, and insert the O-rings.
Install the ODU on the support frame as shown in Fig. 3.21 and tighten the four fixing
screws.
Fig. 3.22 shows the ODU installed on the frame in 1+1 configuration.
Frequency
band
RF
(GHz)
3.2.4.1
1+1 Frame - Attenuation, type of flange and P/N
Tab. 3.6
1+1 frame - Attenuation, type of flange and P/N

1+1 Frame
HSBY Balanced
P/N
1+1 Frame
HSBY Unbalanced
Coupling
Attenuation
(dB)
P/N
Coupling
Attenuation
(dB)
MAIN
ST.BY
Type of flange
(to Antenna)
6L/6U
534-113/06
3 + 0.3
534-112/06
1.5
10 + 1.5
UDR 70
534-113/07
3 + 0.3
534-112/07
1.5
10 + 1.5
UDR 84
534-113/07
3 + 0.3
534-112/07
1.5
10 + 1.5
UDR 84
10
534-113/10
3 + 0.3
534-112/10
1.5
10 + 1.5
UDR 100
11
534-113/11
3 + 0.3
534-112/11
1.5
10 + 1.5
UDR 100
13
534-113/13
3 + 0.3
534-112/13
1.5
10 + 1.5
UDR 120
1+1 Frame
Frequency Diversity
(Co-polar)
1+1 Frame
Frequency Diversity
(Cross-polar)
Frequency
band
RF
(GHz)
P/N
Coupling
Attenuation
(dB)
P/N
Coupling
Attenuation
(dB)
6L/6U
534-115/06
0.1
534-116/06
0.1
UDR 70
534-115/07
0.1
534-116/07
0.1
UDR 84
534-115/07
0.1
534-116/07
0.1
UDR 84
11
534-116/11
0.1
UDR 100
13
534-116/13
0.1
UDR 120
Type of flange
(to Antenna)

3-24
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.19
1+1 frame - Pole fixing
POLE 115 mm
1+1 FRAME

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-25
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.20
1+1 frame - O-Rings
COVER
O-RING
O-RINGS
COVER
COVER
(*) - THE O-RINGS ARE DELIVERED WITH THE FRAME

3-26
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.21
1+1 frame - ODU installation
FIXING SCREWS
ODU

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-27
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.22
1+1 frame - installed ODUs

3-28
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.5
Solar shield
The ODU is protected with a solar shield fixed through 4 screws.
Install the shield on the equipment and tighten the 4 screws as shown in Fig. 3.23.
Fig. 3.23
Solar shield installation
ODU
SOLAR SHIELD
SCREW

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-29
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6
3.2.6.1
Fig. 3.24
Not integrated system (solution with flexible waveguide)

1+0 system
Connections (1+0 System)

1 - Antenna
2 - Pole diam 115 mm
3 - Antenna support
4 - ODU
5 - 1/4 coaxial cable (IF cable)
6 - Flexible waveguide
7 - ODU frame
8 - Flexible waveguide support
P
= PRESSURIZABLE FLANGE
= UNPRESSURIZABLE FLANGE
VERTICAL
POLARIZATION
HORIZONTAL
POLARIZATION

3-30
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6.2
Fig. 3.25
1+1 HSBY system
Connections (1+1 Hot Standby system)

1 - Antenna
3 - Antenna support
4 - ODU
7 - ODU frame

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-31
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6.3
Fig. 3.26
2+0 system
Connections (2+0 system)

1 - Antenna
3 - Antenna support
4 - ODU
7 - ODU frame

3-32
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6.4
Fig. 3.27
2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with one

antenna)
Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with one antenna)
1 - Antenna
3 - Antenna support
4 - ODU
7 - ODU frame
9 - RF LO synch. cables
10 - IF LO synch. cables
9
10

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-33
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6.5
Fig. 3.28
2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with two

antennas)
Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with two antennas)
1 - Antenna
3 - Antenna support
4 - ODU
7 - ODU frame
2
1
6
8
10
4
9
4
3
1
6
8
10
4
5

3-34
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6.6
Fig. 3.29
2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization co-channel

Connections (2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC system)
1 - Antenna
3 - Antenna support
4 - ODU
7 - ODU frame
9
10

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-35
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7
3.2.7.1
Fig. 3.30
Not integrated system (solution with elliptical waveguide)

1+0 system

1 - Antenna
3 - Antenna support
4 - ODU
6 - Elliptical waveguide
90 E
BEND
7 - ODU frame
8 - Elliptical waveguide support
P
= PRESSURIZABLE FLANGE
= UNPRESSURIZABLE FLANGE
VERTICAL
POLARIZATION
TWIST
HORIZONTAL
POLARIZATION
UNIVERSAL CLAMP
AND RUBBER BUSY
PRESSURIZATION
WINDOW
RIGHT
SECTION

3-36
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.2
Fig. 3.31
1+1 system HSBY
Connections (1+1 Hot Standby system)

1 - Antenna
3 - Antenna support
4 - ODU
7 - ODU frame

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-37
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.3
Fig. 3.32
2+0 system

1 - Antenna
3 - Antenna support
4 - ODU
7 - ODU frame

3-38
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.4
Fig. 3.33
2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with one

antenna)
Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with one antenna)
1 - Antenna
3 - Antenna support
4 - ODU
7 - ODU frame
2
1
3
5
7
4
4
8
5
8
6

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-39
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.5
Fig. 3.34
2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with two

antennas)
Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with two antennas)
1 - Antenna
3 - Antenna support
4 - ODU
7 - ODU frame
2
1
3
5
7
4
4
8
5
7

3-40
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.6
Fig. 3.35
2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization co-channel

Connections (2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC system)
1 - Antenna
3 - Antenna support
4 - ODU
7 - ODU frame
2
1
3
5
7
4
4
8
5
8
6

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-41
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.7
Fig. 3.36
Static desiccator for small system
Static desiccator for small system
WAVEGUIDE CONNECTOR
ODU SIDE
STATIC DESICCATOR
IT IS RECOMMENDED FOR SMALL AND SHORT WAVEGUIDE RUN UP TO:

5 m (7 GHz) AND 6 m (8 GHz)
* = TYPICAL SERVICE LIFE IS ONE YEAR.
3.2.7.8
Fig. 3.37
Pressurization with external dehydrator
Pressurization with external dehydrator
WAVEGUIDE CONNECTOR
EXTERNAL
DEHYDRATOR
ODU SIDE
DEHYDRATOR
PIPE
136-510/11
IT IS RECOMMENDED FOR WAVEGUIDE RUN OVER:
5 m (7 GHz) AND 6 m (8 GHz)
Before inserting the static desiccator, it it recommended to clear the waveguide using
nitrogen or dry air with a double quantity respect to the volume of the installed
waveguide.

3-42
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.9
P/N and composition
ODU 6 GHz
Tab. 3.7
Elliptical waveguide (31263-XXX): composition

ITEM
1a
1b
2
3a
3b
Tab. 3.8
Description
P/N
Q.ty
P/N
Q.ty
Elliptical waveguide (6L)

Elliptical waveguide (6U)
Adapter for angular (10 pcs)
Waveguide clamp (10 pcs)
Connectors and accessories (31263-778SR): composition

ITEM
a1
a2
b
d
e
f1
f2
A
B
C
E
Description
Waveguide connector (6L)(PDR 70)
Waveguide connector (6U) (PDR 70)
Pressurization window (UDR-UDR 70)
Waveguide support
Universal clamp (diam. 62)
Rubber bush (diam. 62)
90 P.E. bend (UDR-UDR 70)
Right section (PDR-PDR 70)
Twist (UDR-PDR 70)
Adapter (UDR70-UDR70)

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-43
3 - INSTALLATION

ODU 7 GHz
Tab. 3.9
Elliptical waveguide (31263-750): composition

ITEM
1a
1b
2
3a
3b
Tab. 3.10
Description
Elliptical waveguide (EWP 64-71)
Elliptical waveguide (EWP 77-71W)
P/N
Q.ty
127-042/05
127-042/14
165-005/84
165-005/69
165-005/70
note 1-3
note 1-4
note 1
note 1-3
note 1-4

ITEM
Description
P/N
Q.ty
2
note 3
2
note 4
1
3
3
3
note 3
3
note 4
1
note 5
1
1
note 2
1
note 6
a1
Waveguide connector EWP 64-71 (PDR 84)
504-237/99
a2
Waveguide connector EWP 77-71W (PDR 84)
504-237/87
b
d
e
f1

Waveguide support
308-005/16
332-055/21
165-005/19
332-202/90
f2
332-202/87
504-393/36
B
C

Twist (UDR-PDR 84)
504-816/27
504-631/21
Adapter (UDR70-UDR84)
504-216/21
Note 1 - Quantity to be defined as per plant requirements.

Note 2 - Optional, use for horizontal polarization only.
Note 3 - For channelling 7.1-7.4 GHz (shifter 161 MHz) and 7.4-7.7 GHz (shifter 154,
161, 168 MHz).
Note 4 - For channelling 7.4-7.9 GHz (shifter 245 MHz).
Note 5 - Do not supply with antennas 1.8 m.
Note 6 - Supply with antennas 1.8 m.

3-44
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

ODU 8 GHz
Tab. 3.11

ITEM
1
2
3
Tab. 3.12
Description
P/N
Q.ty
127-042/06
165-005/84
165-005/70
note 1
note 1
note 1

ITEM
a
b
d
e
f
A
B
C
Description
Waveguide connector (PDR 84)
Waveguide support
Twist (UDR-PDR 84)
P/N
Q.ty
504-237/87
308-005/16
332-055/21
165-005/19
332-202/87
504-393/36
504-816/27
504-631/21
2
1
3
3
3
1
1
1
note 2


SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-45
3 - INSTALLATION

ODU 10 GHz
Tab. 3.13
Elliptical waveguide (31263-YYY): composition

ITEM
1
2
3
Tab. 3.14
Description
Elliptical waveguide
P/N
Q.ty
165-005/84
165-005/71
note 1
note 1
note 1
Connectors and accessories (31263-YYYSR): composition

ITEM
a
b
d
e
f
A
B
C
Description
Waveguide support
Twist (UDR-PDR 100)
P/N
Q.ty
308-005/34
332-055/21
165-005/17
332-202/81
504-418/52
504-816/33
504-657/01
2
1
3
3
3
1 (note 5)
1
1 (note 2)


3-46
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

ODU 11 GHz
Tab. 3.15

ITEM
1
2
3
Tab. 3.16
Description
P/N
Q.ty
127-042/07
165-005/84
165-005/71
note 1
note 1
note 1

ITEM
a
b
d
e
f
A
B
C
Description
Waveguide support
Twist (UDR-PDR 100)
P/N
Q.ty
504-237/88
308-005/34
332-055/21
165-005/17
332-202/81
504-418/52
504-816/33
504-657/01
2
1
3
3
3
1 (note 5)
1
1 (note 2)


SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-47
3 - INSTALLATION

ODU 13 GHz
Tab. 3.17

ITEM
1
2
3
Tab. 3.18
Description
Elliptical waveguide (EWP 127)
P/N
Q.ty
127-042/08
165-005/84
165-005/72
note 1
note 1
note 1

ITEM
f
h
i
l
n
p
q
r
Description
Waveguide support
Twist (UDR-PDR 120)
P/N
Q.ty
504-237/89
308-005/35
332-055/21
165-005/17
332-202/83
504-418/53
504-816/34
504-657/11
2
1
3
3
3
1 (note 5)
1
1 (note 2)


3-48
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.3 INTERNAL CONNECTIONS ( for SRA4 IDU
only)
The internal connections are based on the equipment configuration and on the type of
channelling implemented.
3.3.1
1.
2+0 CC configured equipment (par. 3.3.1):

The internal connections must be made between the two ODU's and on the IDU.
2.
2x(1+1) FD CC configured equipment (par. 3.3.2 and par. 3.3.3)
3.
2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configured equipment (par. 3.3.4)
4.
N+1 configured equipment (par. 3.3.5):

The internal connections must be made between the two IDU's.
2+0 CC Configuration
To set up the CC configuration coaxial cable connections must be implemented on the
IDU assembly and on the ODU assemblies (see Fig. 3.38 and Fig. 3.39).
Fig. 3.38
IDU assembly with CC configuration connections

CONNECTIONS for
CC CONFIGURATION
(Note)
CHACHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
LCT
F
A
N
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
PS
IF
PS
Note: These cables are included in the P/N 702-300/12.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-49
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.39
ODU AP/CC assemblies with CC configuration connections
IF LO coaxial cable
Antenna
side
Antenna
side
ODU
AP/CC 1
TOP VIEW
ODU
AP/CC 2
TOP VIEW
RF LO coaxial cable
Antenna
side
Antenna
side
ODU
AP/CC 1
BOTTOM VIEW
ODU
AP/CC 2
BOTTOM VIEW

3-50
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.3.2
2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with one antenna)

IDU assembly and on the ODU assemblies (see Fig. 3.40, Fig. 3.41 and Fig. 3.42).
Fig. 3.40

CONNECTIONS for
CC CONFIGURATION
(Note)
IDU 1+1 (V-pol.)

CHA CHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
IDU 1+1 (H-pol.)
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
CO-CH ODU PWR

I
O
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CH. 1
PS
V-pol.
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
IF
In Out
IF
CH. 2
PS
CO-CH ODU PWR

I
O
IF
In Out
CH. 1
PS
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
H-pol.
IF
CH. 2
PS
E-link
Note: Cables P/N 314-107/97 L=150mm, these cables are included in the
P/N 702-300/12.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-51
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.41
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF HYBR.
V Pol.
SIDE
RF HYBR.
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 3
TOP SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 1
TOP SIDE VIEW
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF HYBR.
V Pol.
SIDE
RF HYBR.
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
TOP SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 4
TOP SIDE VIEW

3-52
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.42
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)
RF LO coaxial cable
RF HYBR.
V Pol.
SIDE
RF HYBR.
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 3
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 1
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
RF LO coaxial cable
RF HYBR.
V Pol.
SIDE
RF HYBR.
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 4
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-53
3 - INSTALLATION

3.3.3
2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with two antennas)

Fig. 3.43

CONNECTIONS for
CC CONFIGURATION
(Note)
1+1 IDU ( V-H) pol.

CHA CHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
1+1 IDU (H-V) pol.
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
CO-CH ODU PWR

I
O
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
D
CO-CH ODU PWR
I
O
CH. 1
V-POL
PS
IF
PS
IF
In Out
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
In Out
CH. 2
H-POL.
CH. 1
H-POL.
PS
IF
CH.2
V-POL.
PS
E-link
P/N 702-300/12.

3-54
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.44
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF C.P. Filter
V Pol.
SIDE
RF C.P. Filter
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 1
TOP SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 3
TOP SIDE VIEW
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF C.P. Filter
H Pol.
SIDE
RF C.P. Filter
V Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
TOP SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 4
TOP SIDE VIEW

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-55
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.45
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)
RF LO coaxial cable
RF C.P. Filter
V Pol.
SIDE
RF C.P. Filter
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 1
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 3
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
RF LO coaxial cable
RF C.P. Filter
H Pol.
SIDE
RF C.P. Filter
V Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 4
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW

3-56
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.3.4
2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration

Fig. 3.46

CONNECTIONS for
CC CONFIGURATION
(Note)
IDU 1+1 (V-pol.)

CHA CHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
IDU 1+1 (H-pol.)
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
CO-CH ODU PWR

I
O
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
MAIN
PS
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
IF
In Out
STBY
PS
CO-CH ODU PWR

I
O
IF
MAIN
In Out
PS
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
V-pol.
IF
H-pol.
IF
STBY
PS
E-link
P/N 702-300/12.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-57
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.47
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby))
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF COUPLER
V Pol.
SIDE
RF COUPLER
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 3
TOP SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 1
TOP SIDE VIEW
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF COUPLER
V Pol.
SIDE
RF COUPLER
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
TOP SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 4
TOP SIDE VIEW

3-58
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.48
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs ( 2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)
RF LO coaxial cable
RF COUPLER
V Pol.
SIDE
RF COUPLER
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 3
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 1
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
RF LO coaxial cable
RF COUPLER
V Pol.
SIDE
RF COUPLER
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 4
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-59
3 - INSTALLATION

3.3.5
N+1 Configuration
The connections between the IDU assemblies shown in Fig. 3.49 must be made in order
to set up the supervisory link (E-link) and the protection link (B-link).
Fig. 3.49
Connection between the IDU assemblies (B-link and E-link)
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU
Key
IDU
MAIN
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU
EXT
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
LCT
F
A
N
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
STBY
PS
IF
CH. 1
PS
IF
CH. 2
PS
IF
PS
CH. 3
B-link (Note)
E-link (Note)
Note: These cables are

(P/N 597-525/57).
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
included in
the
N+1
base connection elements

3-60
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.4 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
All the connectors used for the external connections are easily accessible from the front
side of the indoor assembly.
All the cables from/to the outside are brought down from the cabinet top inside the side
wall slots or, in the case the wiring is running under the raised floor, they are made to
ascend likewise.
3.4.1
SRA4 IDU
3.4.1.1
Primary supply voltage connection

The outdoor assembly (ODU) is remotely power supplied by the indoor assembly (P/N
702-300/12) by means of an IF coaxial connection cable (2 in the 1+1 configuration).
The indoor assembly BB units are fed by DC/DC converters, which transform the
delivered -48 V voltage.
The primary supply voltage, delivered by 48 V battery, has to be applied to the 2-poles
male connector MAIN POWER INPUT. See Fig. 3.50.
Fig. 3.50
Primary Power Supply Connections
CHA CHB
Alarm
Key
IDU PWR
I
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
STM-1 #1
In Out
STM-1 #2
In
Out
CHA CHB
Q-lan
E--link
LCT
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
2MBit/s
In Out
STM-1 #1
In Out
In
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
STM-1 #2
In Out
ODU PWR
O
I
CO-CH
CABLE
ALM
Out
CO-CH
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
In
IF
PS
ODU PWR
O
IF
Out I
PS
Main power
input
A2
A1
Soldering side view

Pin No
A1
A2
Signal
-VBAT
+VBAT

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-61
3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.1.2
Connector functions
Fig. 3.52 to Fig. 3.56 and Tab. 3.19 to Tab. 3.25, show the positions and functions of the
connectors P/N 598-645/45.
In the N+1 configuration the connectors with a cross in Fig. 3.51 are not used.
Fig. 3.51
Connectors not used in the N+1 configuration
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU
Key
IDU
MAIN
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU
EXT
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
LCT
E-link
F
A
N
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
STBY
PS
IF
CH. 1
PS
IF
CH. 2
PS
IF
PS
CH. 3
B-link

3-62
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.52
155 Mbit/s Tributary Coaxial Connections

Electrical interface
CHA CHB
Alarm
Key
IDU PWR
I
U
S
E
R
V11
ODU
ALM
STM-1 #1
In Out
2MBit/s
In Out
G703
STM-1 #2
In Out
E- link
LCT
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
STM-1 #1
In Out
STM-1 #2
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU PWR
O
I
In
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
IF
PS
IF
PS
STM 1 #2
STM 1 #1
IN
Out
CO-CH
CABLE
ALM
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
In
Exp. Port
CHA CHB
Q-lan
CO-CH
CABLE
ALM
IN
OUT
OUT
Optical interface
CHA CHB
Alarm
Q-lan
E- link
Key
LCT
IDU PWR
O
U
n.
F
A
N
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
STM-1 #2
Out In
STM 1 #1
OUT
Tab. 3.19
IN
CABLE
ALM
CO-CH
In
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
ODU PWR
I
O
CO-CH
In
Out
Exp. Port
ODU PWR
O
I
IF
PS
IF
PS
STM 1 #2
OUT
IN
155 Mbit/s Electrical Tributary Coaxial Connections

Coax.
IN
OUT
Tab. 3.20
ODU
ALM
Signal
155 Mbit/s Tributary Input 75 Ohm (G.703)
155 Mbit/s Tributary Output 75 Ohm (G.703)
STM-1 Optical Tributary Connections

SC
IN
OUT
Signal
Optical Tributary Input
Optical Tributary Output

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-63
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.53
WST 2 Mbit/s Coaxial Connections

CHA CHB
Alarm
Key
IDU PWR
I
U
S
E
R
V11
ODU
ALM
G703
STM-1 #1
In Out
2MBit/s
In Out
STM-1 #2
In Out
CHA CHB
E- link
Q-lan
LCT
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
STM-1 #1
In Out
CO-CH
In
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
CABLE
ALM
STM-1 #2
In Out
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
CO-CH
In
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
IF
PS
IF
PS
WS
IN
Tab. 3.21
OUT
WST 2 Mbit/s Coaxial Connections

Connect. Position
Description
IN
2048 Mbit/s/75 Ohm (G.703) WS Input
OUT
Fig. 3.54
2048 Mbit/s/75 Ohm (G.703) WS Output
Alarm Connector
CHA CHB
Alarm
Key
IDU PWR
I
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
STM-1 #1
In Out
STM-1 #2
In Out
CHA CHB
Q-lan
E- link
LCT
13
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
STM-1 #1
In Out
STM-1 #2
In Out
CO-CH
In
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
CABLE
ALM
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
CO-CH
In
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
IF
PS
IF
PS
25 ALARMS 14

3-64
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Tab. 3.22
Alarms Connector (IDU assembly)

Pin
Signal
ALIM OFF
2
3
8
9
4
10
5
11
6
12
7
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
CRITICAL
MINOR
MAJOR
TEST
CEN-OUT1
CEN-OUT2
CEN-OUT3
CEN-OUT4
CEN-IN1
CEN-IN2
CEN-IN3
CEN-IN4
RESTFAULT
RESTFAULTN
-
Description
No secondary power supply on both
BB-Modem units
Critical alarm
Minor alarm
Major alarm
Test/Warning alarm
Station command output #1
Station alarm input #1
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Interface B = electronic contact
Interface type
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
-
normal condition = open (-3 ... +2 Vdc; > 60 kohm)

alarm condition = ground (-3 ... +2 Vdc; < 200 ohm)
INPUT STATION ALARMS:
the input does not sink current as long as the input voltage is less than 5 V
the circuit will not be damaged as long as the input voltage is between -70 V
and 75 V.
OUTPUTS ALARMS:
the external equipment (sensing the output alarms) can be positive voltage
or negative voltage:
open resistance > 500 Mohm
ground resistance < 1 ohm
max. switching voltage: 110 Vdc
max. switching current: 0.5 A
max. switching power (resistive load): 15 W

Note: Refer also to par. 2.2 "TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS" for the electrical
interface of the alarms.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-65
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.55
LCT (RS 232) Connector

CHA CHB
Alarm
Key
IDU PWR
I
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
STM-1 #1
In Out
STM-1 #2
In
Out
CHA CHB
Q-lan
E- link
LCT
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
STM-1 #1
In Out
CO-CH
In
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
CABLE
ALM
STM-1 #2
In Out
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
CO-CH
In
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
IF
PS
IF
PS
LCT
6
1
Tab. 3.23
9
5

PIN
Signal
I/O
Description
F_CD
Received Line Signal Detector (Data Carrier

Detect)
F_RXD
Received Data
F_TXD
Transmit Data
F_DTR
Data Terminal Ready
GND
F_DSR
Data Set Ready
F_RTS
Request To Send
F_CTS
Clear To Send
n.c.
Ring Indicator
Signal Ground

3-66
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.56
64 kbit/s service channel connector
CHA CHB
Alarm
Key
IDU PWR
I
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
STM-1 #1
In Out
STM-1 #2
In
Out
CHA CHB
Q-lan
E- link
LCT
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
2MBit/s
In Out
Tab. 3.24
STM-1 #1
In Out
CO-CH
In
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
STM-1 #2
In Out
CABLE
ALM
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
CO-CH
In
ODU PWR
O
IF
PS
IF
Out I
PS
V.11 channel connector

PIN
Signal
I/O
Description
CKB
Clock B - codirectional output
CKA
Clock A - codirectional output
DB
Data B - codirectional output
DA
Data A - codirectional output
CKB
Clock B - contradirectional output
CKA
Clock A - contradirectional output
DB
Data B - contradirectional input
DAa
Data A - contradirectional input
In case theExternal EOWshould be used, use the V11 connector as follows:

- 1+0/1+1 configuration: use the V11 connector of the upper BB-MODEM unit
- N+1 configuration: use the V11 connector of the lower BB-MODEM unit of the
MAIN IDU
- 2+0 configuration: use the V11 connector of the two BB-MODEM units.
Tab. 3.25
G.703 channel connector

PIN
Signal
I/O
Description
OUT -
Output -
OUT +
Output +
IN +
Input +
IN -
Input -

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-67
3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.1.3
Base connection elements

In the following paragraph is given the information on the cables to be used during the
installation.
3.4.1.3.1 Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-525/21)

Refer to Tab. 3.26.
Tab. 3.26
Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-525/21)

Ref.
Fig. 3.57
P/N
332-308/64
Power supply kit
14
422-030/83
Metal shell
15
422-062/61
Sub-D conn 25P
16
422-053/63
Modular plug 8P shielded
26
421-015/70
1.0/2.3 coaxial plug
30
314-302/70
Earth cable
32
206-701/06D
Hexagonal thin nuts M4
33
207-505/09D
Plain washer SST 4 PIC
34
207-501/09D
Spring washer Inox 4
61
206-710/21
Cage nut M6
62
205-534/11D
Screw 6x16
63
211-516/01
Bush 6x3.5
65
332-309/76
Mounting kit
80
314-327/91
(N-OSM) coaxial cable
82
332-011/35
IDU/ODU cable clampe kit
Description
Q.ty

3-68
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.1.3.2 Connection elements for 1+1/2+0 system (P/N 597-525/22)
Refer to Tab. 3.27.
Tab. 3.27
Connection elements for 1+1/2+0 system (P/N 597-525/22)

Ref.
Fig. 3.58
P/N
332-308/64
Power supply kit
14
422-030/83
Metal shell
15
422-062/61
Sub-D conn 25P
16
422-053/63
26
421-015/70
12
30
314-302/70
Earth cable
32
206-701/06D
33
207-505/09D
34
207-501/09D
61
206-710/21
Cage nut M6
62
205-534/11D
Screw 6x16
63
211-516/01
Bush 6x3.5
65
332-309/76
Mounting kit
80
314-327/91
82
332-011/35
Description
Q.ty
3.4.1.3.3 Connection elements for upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0

(P/N 597-525/33)
Refer to Tab. 3.28.
Tab. 3.28
Connection elements for upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 (P/N 597-525/33)

Ref.
Fig. 3.59
P/N
332-308/64
Power supply kit
16
422-053/63
26
421-015/70
80
314-327/91
Description
Q.ty

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-69
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.57
Connection kit for 1+0 system
26
15
16
14
Alarms interface
26*
2 Mbit/s out
2 Mbit/s in
64 kbit/s G703 interface

64 kbit/s V11 interface
80
STM-1 in 1
STM-1 out 1
IDU-ODU
cable
26*
STM-1 in 2
STM-1 out 2
6
E-Link interface
Q interface
PWR 1
16
To connect to the rack ground
32
30
33
34
65
63
61
62
* = Only for electrical STM-1 traffic

3-70
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.58
Connection kit for 1+1/2+0 system
26
15
16
14
26*
2 Mbit/s out
2 Mbit/s in

Alarms interface
80
STM-1 in 1
STM-1 out 1
IDU-ODU
cable
26*
STM-1 in 2
STM-1 out 2
Q interface
E-Link interface
PWR 1
16
16
STM-1 out 2
STM-1 in 2
2 Mbit/s in
STM-1 out 1
2 Mbit/s out
STM-1 in 1
26*
32
26
26*
To connect to the rack ground
33
30
34
65
63
61
62

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-71
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.59
Connection kit for 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 upgrading
80
IDU-ODU
cable
PWR 1
16
STM-1 out 2
2 Mbit/s in
STM-1 out 1
2 Mbit/s out
STM-1 in 1
26*
STM-1 in 2
26*
26*

3-72
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.2
3.4.2.1
SRA4 IDU-STM1
Primary supply voltage connection
The outdoor assembly (Transceiver) is remotely power supplied by the indoor assembly
(P/N 702-300/12) by means of an IF coaxial connection cable (2 in the 1+1
configuration).
The indoor assembly BB units are fed by DC/DC converters, which transform the
delivered -48 V voltage.
The primary supply voltage, delivered by 48 V battery, has to be applied to the 2-poles
male connector MAIN POWER INPUT. See Fig. 3.50.
Fig. 3.60
Primary Power Supply Connections in IDU assembly
Main power
input
A2
A1
Soldering side view

Pin No
A1
A2
Signal
-VBAT
+VBAT

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-73
3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.2.2
Connector functions
Fig. 3.61 to Fig. 3.64 and Tab. 3.29 to Tab. 3.34, show the positions and functions of the
connectors P/N 598-645/45.
Fig. 3.61
155 Mbit/s Tributary Connections

Electrical interface
STM 1
IN
OUT
Optical interface
STM 1
OUT
Tab. 3.29
IN
155 Mbit/s Electrical Tributary Coaxial Connections

Coax.
IN
OUT
Tab. 3.30
Signal
155 Mbit/s Tributary Input 75 Ohm (G.703)
155 Mbit/s Tributary Output 75 Ohm (G.703)
STM-1 Optical Tributary Connections

SC
IN
OUT
Signal
Optical Tributary Input
Optical Tributary Output

3-74
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.62
Alarm Connector (IDU assembly)
13
25
Tab. 3.31
ALARMS
14
Alarms Connector (IDU assembly)

Pin
Signal
ALIM OFF
2
3
8
9
4
10
5
11
6
12
7
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
CRITICAL
MINOR
MAJOR
TEST
CEN-OUT1
CEN-OUT2
CEN-OUT3
CEN-OUT4
CEN-IN1
CEN-IN2
CEN-IN3
CEN-IN4
RESTFAULT
RESTFAULTN
-
Description
No secondary power supply on both
BB-Modem units
Critical alarm
Minor alarm
Major alarm
Test/Warning alarm
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Interface B = electronic contact
Interface type
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
-
normal condition = open (-3 ... +2 Vdc; > 60 kohm)

alarm condition = ground (-3 ... +2 Vdc; < 200 ohm)

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-75
3 - INSTALLATION

INPUT STATION ALARMS:
the input does not sink current as long as the input voltage is less than 5 V
the circuit will not be damaged as long as the input voltage is between -70 V
and 75 V.
OUTPUTS ALARMS:
the external equipment (sensing the output alarms) can be positive voltage
or negative voltage:
open resistance > 500 Mohm
ground resistance < 1 ohm
max. switching voltage: 110 Vdc
max. switching current: 0.5 A
max. switching power (resistive load): 15 W

Note: Refer also to par. 2.2 "TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS" for the electrical
interface of the alarms.

3-76
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.63
LCT (RS 232) Connector (IDU shelf)
LCT
Tab. 3.32

PIN
Signal
I/O
Description
F_CD
Received Line Signal Detector (Data Carrier

Detect)
F_RXD
Received Data
F_TXD
Transmit Data
F_DTR
Data Terminal Ready
GND
F_DSR
Data Set Ready
F_RTS
Request To Send
F_CTS
Clear To Send
n.c.
Ring Indicator
Signal Ground

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-77
3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.64
64 kbit/s service channel connector
Tab. 3.33
V.11 channel connector

PIN
Signal
I/O
Description
CKB
Clock B - codirectional output
CKA
Clock A - codirectional output
DB
Data B - codirectional output
DA
Data A - codirectional output
CKB
Clock B - contradirectional output
CKA
Clock A - contradirectional output
DB
Data B - contradirectional input
DAa
Data A - contradirectional input
In case theExternal EOWshould be used, use the V11 connector as follows:

- 1+0/1+1 configuration: use the V11 connector of the upper BB-MODEM unit
- 2+0 configuration: use the V11 connector of the two BB-MODEM units.
Tab. 3.34
G.703 channel connector

PIN
Signal
I/O
Description
OUT -
Output -
OUT +
Output +
IN +
Input +
IN -
Input -

3-78
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.2.3
External connection elements

In the following paragraph is given the information on the cables to be used during the
installation.

Refer to Tab. 3.35.
Tab. 3.35

P/N
Description
Q.ty
332-308/64
Power supply kit
14
422-030/83
Metal shell
15
422-062/61
Sub-D conn 25P
16
422-053/63
26
421-015/70
30
314-302/70
Earth cable
32
206-701/06D
33
207-505/09D
34
207-501/09D
61
206-710/21
Cage nut M6
62
205-534/11D
Screw 6x16
63
211-516/01
Bush 6x3.5
65
332-309/76
Mounting kit
80
314-327/91
82
332-011/35

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-79
3 - INSTALLATION

Refer to Tab. 3.36.
Tab. 3.36

P/N
Description
Q.ty
332-308/64
Power supply kit
14
422-030/83
Metal shell
15
422-062/61
Sub-D conn 25P
16
422-053/63
26
421-015/70
30
314-302/70
Earth cable
32
206-701/06D
33
207-505/09D
34
207-501/09D
61
206-710/21
Cage nut M6
62
205-534/11D
Screw 6x16
63
211-516/01
Bush 6x3.5
65
332-309/76
Mounting kit
80
314-327/91
82
332-011/35

3-80
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.3
ODU connections for received field measurement

The ODU has a BNC connector for the measurement of the received field (see
Fig. 3.65).
Fig. 3.65
Connector for the measurement of received field
TOP VIEW ODU AP
For factory use
BNC connector
for Rx field
measurement
For factory use
TOP VIEW ODU AP/CC

For factory use
BNC connector
for Rx field
measurement
For factory use

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-81
3 - INSTALLATION

3.5 IDU/ODU CONNECTION WITH BRAIDED OR
1/4 COAXIAL CABLE
3.5.1
Fig. 3.66
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - ODU side connection

Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - ODU side connection
Coaxial connector
90 N type
(a)(b)
To IDU section
To IDU section
(a)
(b)
Braided or 1/4 IN/OUT

coaxial cable
(a)(b)
For P/N of Braided coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.6.

For P/N of 1/4 coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.7.

3-82
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.2
Fig. 3.67
Grounding connections
Grounding connections
Grounding
kit
(b) (a)
(a) (c)
Braided or 1/4
coaxial cable
Ground cable
1x16 mm2
(d)
(a) (b) Braided or 1/4

coaxial cable
Grounding plate
(d)(e)
333-309/91
(on request)
Grounding plate
(f) 333-047/07
(on request)
Connect to
Station Main Earting
(d)
Bending radius
Braided or 1/4
coaxial cable
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(a) (b)
To connect to the
station grounding
system
For P/N of Braided coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.6. while for P/N of 1/4 coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.7.
For the fixing of the Braided or 1/4 coaxial cables see Fig. 3.69.
The standard delivery includes only one grounding kit to be installed before the entrance of the shelter/
equipment room. Additional grounding kits are provided on demand.
This cable is provided with the electrical installation kit 597-525/05
For the fixing of the ground plate see Fig. 3.68.
Optional item, if required must be separately provided.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-83
3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.3
Fig. 3.68
(a)
Pole fixing of the grounding plate kit (P/N 332-309/91)

Pole fixing of the grounding plate kit (P/N 332-309/91)
Tie
223-002/86
Plate
332-004/92
(a)
Grouding plate
257-41/507
(b)
Hex nut
(b)
Spring washer
(b)
Screw
Plain washer
(a)
(b)
Terminal tube
16 mm2
(b)
Grounding cable (c)

1x16 mm2 YE-GR
(a)
(b)
(c)
These materials are included in P/N 332-309/91.

These materials are provided with installation kit 314-205/76
This cable is provided with electrical material 597-525/05

3-84
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.4
Fig. 3.69
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Typical fixing
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Typical fixing
Universal
cable clamp
(332-202/95)
(332-202/96)
(b)
Cable tie
(223-009/27)
(a)
(a)
Cable tie
(223-009/25)
indoor
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable
CABLE TIE (a)
UNIVERSAL CABLE CLAMP (b) (c)
External back cable tie

D = 74 to 140 mm 223-009/27 (a)
D = 26 to 62 mm 223-009/25 (b)
for 2 Braided or 1/4 cables

332-202/65
(a)
(b)
for 4 Braided or 1/4cables

332-202/66
N 10 external black tie, for the fixing of the cable running on the pole, are included in the installation kit
(314-205/76).
Material to be adopted according to the installation requirements, is not included in the installation materials,
if required must be separately provided. Refer to PAR. 3.5.4.1 for the Braided cable recommended spacing and
refer to PAR. 3.5.4.2 for the 1/4 cable recommended spacing.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-85
3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.4.1
Recommended clamp spacing for Braided coaxial cable

Clamp spacing recommendation is based on the guidelines stated in EIA Standard
RS-222 (Structural Standards for Steel Antenna Towers and Antenna Supporting
Structures) and BSI CP3 (Code of Basic Data for the Design of Buildings, Wind
Loading).
Geographical location, as well as height of tower/must, to which the clamps are
attached, may have a significant impact on installation conditions.
Therefore, unless otherwise specified, the assumptions made to define the maximum
clamp spacing are the following:
Tower height 45m
1/2 radial ice
Clamps properly installed and tightened
Based on the above conditions, the recommended MAXIMUM CLAMP SPACING for
Braided COAXIAL CABLE type CNT 300FR (Andrew) and ICN48 (INTERCOND) is 0.5
m (wind load is 240 km/h)
3.5.4.2
Recommended clamp spacing for 1/4 coaxial cable

Clamp spacing recommendation is based on the guidelines stated in EIA Standard
RS-222 (Structural Standards for Steel Antenna Towers and Antenna Supporting
Structures) and BSI CP3 (Code of Basic Data for the Design of Buildings, Wind
Loading).
Geographical location, as well as height of tower/must, to which the clamps are
attached, may have a significant impact on installation conditions.
Therefore, unless otherwise specified, the assumptions made to define the maximum
clamp spacing are the following:
Tower height 45m
1/2lh radial ice
Clamps properly installed and tightened
Based on the above conditions, the recommended MAXIMUM CLAMP SPACING for
1/4 COAXIAL CABLE type LDF1RN-50 (Andrew) and CF 1/4lr CuH (RFS) is:
0.8m (Wind Load 200 Km/h) or 0.5m (Wind Load 240 Km/h).

3-86
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.5
Fig. 3.70
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side

IBraided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side
TO GROUNDING BAR
ETSI (19) RACK
Braided or 1/4
coaxial cable
(a)
(a)
to odu
section
(b)
OSM/N coaxial tail

(L.=1 Mt.)
(314-327/91)
Coaxial N-plug
Ground cable
ye-gr 6 mm2
(314-304/51)
(c)
(c)
Coaxial cable
fixing bracket
(232-124/20)
(b)
OSM/N coaxial tail

(L.=1 Mt.)
(314-327/91)
to idu
section
(a)
(b
(c)
For P/N of Braided coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.6. while for P/N of 1/4 coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.7.
This material is included in the base connection elements (2+0 with ADM) 597-525/90.
This material is included in the fixing accessories 332-011/35, included in the base connection element 597-525/90.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-87
3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.6
Tab. 3.37
Braided coaxial cable Andrew and Intercond sets

ANDREW set (a)
P/N
Description
Unit
Q.ty
104-009/50
314-331/88 (b)
Braided CNT300 - 50 Ohm COAXIAL CABLE
Mt.
(c)
597-525/78A
597-525/78 (b)
Braided COAX CABLE ACCESSORIES
Nr.
(d)
421-025/38
COAX N-PLUG
421-008/35
90 COAX N-PLUG
333-031/21
GROUNDING KIT
Tab. 3.38
INTERCOND set (a)
P(N
Description
Unit
Q.ty
104-009/51
314-331/88 (b)
CF 3/10l3 ICN48 - 50 Ohm COAXIAL CABLE
Mt.
(c)
597-525/78B
597-525/78 (b)
Braided COAX CABLE ACCESSORIES
Nr.
(d)
421-025/39
COAX N-PLUG
421-008/36
90 COAX N-PLUG
333-031/22
GROUNDING KIT
a)
= The ANDREW and INTERCOND material sets are alternative to each other
b)
= Commercial reference code
c)
= The max length of one IDU/ODU connection is 190 mt
d)
= Q.ty 1 for each IDU/ODU connection

3-88
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.7
Tab. 3.39
1/4 coaxial cable Andrew set

Andrew set
P/N
Description
Unit
Q.ty
104-009/42
1/4 LDF1RN - 50 ohm COAXIAL CABLE
(314-327/79)(a)
Mt.
NOTE
1
597-523/94A
1/4 COAX CABLE ACCESSORIES
(597-523/94(a)*
Nr.
421-008/88
STRAIGHT N type COAX N-PLUG
421-008/84
90 N type COAX N-PLUG
333-031/19
GROUNDING KIT
The above listed quantities are relevant to one IDU/ODU connection

NOTE 1 = The max length of one IDU/ODU connection is 300 m
NOTE 2 = N1 Grounding Kit is standard solution for a 1/4coaxial cable typical
path 50m, the use of additional Grounding Kits has to be evaluated according to
the path type.
a)
= COMMERCIAL REFERENCE CODE

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
3-89
3 - INSTALLATION
LA
PA
G
E

3-90
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
4 - ACTIVATION
4 ACTIVATION
4.1 PRESETTINGS
In this paragraph instructions are given to check and, if required, to carry out the
presettings relevant to the system type where the equipment is utilized.
There are two presetting types:
4.1.1
Hardware settings, performed through jumpers or connections
Software settings, carried out through PC with dedicated software. With regard to
the system software setting options refer to the Guide to the use of the control
software", in the Operator Manual (OMN).
Hardware settings
In the equipment there are no hardware settings.
4.1.2
System E2PROM
The IDU contains two different system EEPROMs to store all the NE configurations:
internal EEPROM in the Controller unit
external EEPROM (KEY), inserted in the front panel of the Alarm Restitution unit.
In the key in the factory have been stored the Serial Number (S/N) and the licence type.
4.2 ACTIVATION
This paragraph includes the procedures for checkings that can be carried out during the
installation while activating the equipment.
Fig. 6.7 and Fig. 6.8 show the connectors and the control elements, located on the
equipment front panel.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
4-1
4 - ACTIVATION

4.2.1
Local checks
All the units comprising the equipment are tested and adjusted at the factory in order to
optimize the characteristics: usually, checks on these unit are not required while
installed.
Therefore, the procedures here below described have to be utilized only in case of
problems arising in the system, due to equipment malfunction.
The checks are:
4.2.2
make sure the equipment is correctly equipped as per indications in the par. 2.3
"EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION".
check the connection cables (or cable) between the indoor assembly and the
outdoor assemblies (or assembly) are connected and IF connection have been
made as per indications in the par. 2.3 "EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION".
check the equipment is connected to the primary supply voltage as described in the
par. 2.3 "EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION".
IDU first installation
Insert the KEY into the right connector on the Alarms Restitution unit.
Switch ON the IDU by turning the switch situated on the front cover of the Alarms
Restitution unit.
At this point the Controller reads the S/N and the type of license of the KEY and
stores it internally.
The LCT shall now be able to complete the equipment configuration. (Based on the
type of license memorised a basic default configuration will be memorised on the
KEY).
When configuring the equipment through the LCT, the configuration will be
automatically memorised both on the Controller unit and on the KEY.
The KEY must always be inserted during regular equipment configuration. Should
it be removed, the "No setting mode" alarm will be activated (and the red
"CRITICALMAJOR" LED will light up on the Controller unit) thereby not allowing
to modify the equipment configuration through the LCT.
If a KEY other than that used during the first installation is inserted while the
equipment is ON, the Controller compares the S/N and the type of license
memorised (and that corresponds to the first installation KEY) with that of the
KEY inserted. A data misalignment is detected and the "No setting mode" alarm
is activated which will prevent modifying the configuration through the LCT.
Check by the LCT that the output power of the Modulator is +5 dBm.

4-2
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
4 - ACTIVATION

The following are the alarms associated to the KEY:
Tab. 4.1
KEY alarms
Alarm
Fig. 4.1
Description
LCT alarm
Key missing or key

mismatch
Physically missing or data

memorised on the key differ
from those memorised on the
IDU
"No setting mode" alarm

activated
Key Fault
Non recoverable data failure
"Key fault" alarm activated
IDU Key position (Alarm Restitution unit)
ALARM
RESTITUTION
Unit
BB/MODEM #1
Unit
CONTROLLER
Unit
BB/MODEM #2
Unit
ALARM
Unita
RESTITUTORE
RESTITUTION
ALLRMI
unit
IDU PWR
Alarms
Key
ON
OF
FAN
Unita
unit
FAN
CONTROLLER
Unita
unit
CONTROLLORE
Q-lan
E-Link
LCT
T
E
S
T
M
N
/
W
C
/
M
J
KEY

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
4-3
4 - ACTIVATION

4.2.3
Alignment
It is necessary to execute the alignment of the antennas to ensure the correct
operation of the equipment and to make reliable the radio link to the remote
terminal.
For the procedures of adjustment and aiming of the antennas, refer to the
documentation annexed to the antennas themselves.
To make easy the aiming operation, the ODU is equipped with a BNC connector that
makes available the AGC voltage as function of the received field.
Fig. 4.2
ODU (AP) connection for the measurement of the received field
Per uso interno
Connettore BNC
per misura del
campo Rx
Fig. 4.3
ODU (AP/CC) connection for the measurement of the received field
Per uso interno
Per uso interno

Connettore BNC
per misura del
campo Rx
The VAGC range is between -3,4 V and 1,2 V (typical values) for PRX values
between -30 dBm and -75 dBm, according to a linear law with rate of about 0,5 V
for 10 dB.

4-4
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
4 - ACTIVATION

4.2.4
4.2.4.1
Checks on equipment
List of checks
4.2.4.2
Control of the system configuration

Configuration of IP address
PTx and PRx
Switching test for 1+1 systems
Background BER
Final checks
Restore of the operating conditions
Control of the system configuration

Control, by means of the supplied SW (LCT), that the system configuration is according
to what required for the connection in object. In particular, it is necessary to set on both
terminals the configuration (see Tab. 2.7 System Type in par. 2.1.2), the operating
frequency and the ATPC enabling, according to what foreseen by the specifications
related to the interested link.
Eventually, configure the equipment according to what specified in Guide to use of the
control software, in the Operator Manual (OMN).
4.2.4.3
Configuration of IP address
On the first installation, the IDU has a default IP address (192.168.255.3) and then the
user can access the NE, set the network IP address and build the map containing the
IP address itself. For this purpose, refer to the guide to use of the management program,
of the OMN manual.
If the network planning was not available, it is necessary to insert, in the two terminals,
addresses belonging to two different IP subnetwork (site A = 100.100.100.6; site B =
150.150.150.6), Netmask 255.255.255.0, to be able to control both the Network
Elements
4.2.4.4
Received and Transmitted Power

By means of Measurement --> Unit menu of the supplied SW (LCT), it is possible to
check the levels of received and transmitted power (refer to the guide to use of the
management program, of OMN manual).
4.2.4.5
Switching test
In presence of protected configurations (1+1 Frequency Diversity or 1+1 Hot Standby),
proceed to the verification of the switching functionality.
With the aid of a SDH frame analyzer, connected to the tributary access points, check
that, after the different switching operations, the service stays active.
For a correct execution of the switching operations, refer to the guide of use of
the management program, in OMN manual.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
4-5
4 - ACTIVATION

4.2.4.6
Background BER
Check that the connection is active and operating (no alarm, payload transit); for this
purpose, a SDH frame analyzer can be connected to the tributary access points or,
alternatively, it is possible to monitor the connection quality by means of the
Performance Monitoring functionality provided by the software for equipment
management (refer to the Operator Manual - OMN).
In this way, check that the qualitative parameters of the connection are in compliance to
the project specification.
4.2.4.7
Final checks
After all the local verifications and the alignment operation have been executed, check
that the levels of the received power in both the terminals are in compliance to the
project specification.
4.2.4.8
Restore of the operating conditions

Once the checks on the connection have been executed, restore the operating
conditions of the system (removing the possible manual forcing).

4-6
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
4 - ACTIVATION

4.3 LIST AND USE OF ACCESSORIES
The accessories required for carrying out check measurements, repairs and parts
replacements of equipment the SRA 4 system consists of, are delivered for each station
where the equipment itself is installed.
This paragraph contains useful indications for the correct use and for the identification
of the accessories that are grouped under the P/N 597-524/95.
4.3.1
List and use of accessories

See Tab. 4.2.
Tab. 4.2
Station accessories
Denomination
Code
Q.ty
Use
Scredriver for screws 4,5x80
323-502/01
It is used for the fixing subrack to the rack
Scredriver for
3x60 Phillips screws
323-502/11
It is used for the assembling and

disassembling of the mechanical parts
Dynamometric key
323-500/99
It is used for the SMA connectors tightening
Exagonal head screw 3 x 8

Elastic washer 3
Exagonal head screw 3 x 12
Exagonal nut 3
204-371/07D
207-501/07D
204-371/09D
206-701/05D
4
8
4
4
It is used to tighten to transition to the w/g

section and to the RT
Cable, connection, 9 contacts

female/male (L = 2.6 m)
314-101/76
It is used for connecting the PC to IDU

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
4-7
4 - ACTIVATION

4.4 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS AND
ALARMS
4.4.1
Normal operating conditions

Normal operating conditions of the equipment are indicated as follows:
All red LEDs on the front panel of the units: OFF
RF output power and RF input power at nominal values.
The normal operating conditions of the front panel LEDs are shown in Fig. 4.4, Fig. 4.5,
Fig. 4.6 and Fig. 4.7.
4.4.2
Alarm conditions
An alarm condition indicates a failure in the outdoor or indoor unit.
An alarm condition in the equipment is indicated by the switching on of a red LED on the
front panel of the failed unit.
The alarms are also processed and managed by the Controller unit. The LCT,
connected to the Controller unit, allows an easy location of the failed unit.
Fig. 4.4
LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (SRA4 IDU)
OFF
See Tab. 6.1
Unita
RESTITUTORE
ALLRMI
CHA
Key
ON
STM-n #1
USER
IDU PWR
Alarms
ODU ALM
CHB
V11
WST
G703
I
OF
Out
Out
CABLE ALM
STM-n #2
I
GREEN ON
See Tab. 6.1
OFF
Out
CO-CHANNEL
I
Out
ODU PWR
ON
IF
CABLE
OFF
Exp. Port
PS
Unita
FAN
CHA
Unita
CONTROLLORE
Q-lan
E-Link
LCT
T
E
S
T
M
N
/
W
C
/
M
J
CHB
ODU ALM
USER
V11
WST
G703
I
Out
STM-n #1
I
Out
STM-n #2
I
Out
CABLE ALM
CO-CHANNEL
I
Out
IF
CABLE
ODU PWR
ON
OFF
Exp. Port
PS
OFF
GREEN
ON

4-8
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
4 - ACTIVATION

Fig. 4.5
LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system

(SRA4 IDU-STM1)
OFF
See Tab. 6.1
GREEN ON
See Tab. 6.1
OFF
OFF
GREEN
ON
Fig. 4.6
LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 2x(1+1)CC system (SRA4 IDU)
GREEN
ON
OFF
See Tab. 6.1
OFF
CHACHB
Alarms
V-pol.
IDU
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
Alarms
H-pol.
IDU
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
LCT
F
A
N
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
OFF
GREEN ON
See Tab. 6.1
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
CH. 1
PS
IF
CH. 2
PS
IF
CH. 1
PS
IF
CH. 2
PS
E-link
Co-Channel
coax cables

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
4-9
4 - ACTIVATION

Fig. 4.7
LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU)
GREEN
ON
OFF
See Tab. 6.1
OFF
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU
Key
IDU
MAIN
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU
EXT
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
LCT
E-link
F
A
N
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
OFF
GREEN ON
See Tab. 6.1
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
STBY
PS
IF
CH. 1
PS
IF
CH. 2
PS
IF
CH. 3
PS
B-link

4-10
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
5 - MAINTENANCE
5 MAINTENANCE
5.1 TROUBLESHOOTIN614-041/17G AND
RESTORING
This paragraph instructs about troubleshooting to be carried out on the equipment.
The malfunctions are pointed out by LEDs on the equipment, on the indoor assembly
front panel (see Fig. 5.1, Fig. 5.2 and Fig. 5.3).
The indications function on the front panel is described in the par. 6.3 "LED,
MONITORING POINTS, CONNECTORS AND SWITCHES".
The sequence of the recommended actions to locate a faulty part of the equipment, to
replace it and to restore the service, are schematized in Fig. 5.5.
5.1.1
Troubleshooting
The failed unit is located by using the LCT: refer to the document "Guide to the use of
the control software", which is part of the Operator Manual (OMN).
Fig. 5.1
LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA4 IDU)
Unita
RESTITUTORE
ALLRMI
CHA
IDU PWR
Alarms
Key
ON
ODU ALM
CHB
STM-n #1
USER
V11
WST
G703
I
OF
Out
Out
CABLE ALM
STM-n #2
I
Out
CO-CHANNEL
I
Out
ODU PWR
ON
IF
CABLE
OFF
Exp. Port
PS
Unita
FAN
CHA
Unita
CONTROLLORE
Q-lan
E-Link
LCT
T
E
S
T
T
E
S
T
M
N
/
W
ODU ALM
USER
C
/
M
J
M
N
/
W
CHB
V11
WST
G703
I
Out
STM-n #1
I
Out
STM-n #2
I
Out
CABLE ALM
CO-CHANNEL
I
Out
IF
CABLE
ODU PWR
ON
OFF
Exp. Port
PS
C
/
M
J

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
5-1
5 - MAINTENANCE

Fig. 5.2
LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA4 IDU-STM1)
T
E
S
T
Fig. 5.3
C
/
M
J
M
N
/
W
LEDs in N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU)
T
E
S
T
M
N
/
W
C
/
M
J
CHACHB
Alarms
Key
IDU
MAIN
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU
EXT
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
LCT
E-link
F
A
N
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11 G703
S
E
R
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
D
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
D
IF
STBY
PS
IF
CH. 1
PS
IF
CH. 2
PS
IF
CH. 3
PS
B-link

5-2
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
5 - MAINTENANCE

5.1.2
Replacement procedures
This paragraph contains the instruction to carry out the system parts fault replacement.
Follow the instructions step by step, otherwise the SW configuration could be lost, and
therefore the LCT is necessary for a new SW configuration setting.
Note: IDU front panel LEDs gives fault status general information; in case of a more
deep investigation about cause and severity one alarm is requested, the LCT is
necessary.
5.1.2.1
5.1.2.2
5.1.2.3
ODU replacement
1.
Power down the ODU (switch on the right side of the relevant BB+MODEM unit in
the IDU) (ODU PWR OFF).
2.
Replace the ODU.
3.
Power up the ODU (switch on the right side of the relevant BB+MODEM unit in the
IDU) (ODU PWR ON).
4.
Verify that the link has been recovered (no alarms)
IDU-ODU cable replacement

1.
Turn the ODU off by the switch on the front panel of the BB+MODEM unit (ODU
PWR OFF).
2.
Disconnect the fault IDO-ODU connection cable.
3.
Connect a new IDU-ODU cable.
4.
Turn the ODU on (ODU PWR ON).
5.
Verifies that the LEDs on the BB+MODEM unit are in the normal operating
conditions.
6.
Otherwise, see Troubleshooting through LCT (OMN manual).
IDU unit replacement
5.1.2.3.1 BB+MODEM unit

BB/modem unit 1 in STI systems
1.
Change the system type:
Should the current system type be 1+1 FD STI, change to 1+1 FD DTI
Should the current system type be 1+1 HSBY STI, change to 1+1 HSBY DTI.
2.
Move the cables (or the optical fibers) of the STM-1#1 signal (and of the STM-1#2
signal in case of 2xSTM-1 capacity) on the front panel of the BB/modem unit 2 and
then set immediately the switch mode to MANUAL and set the Tributary switch to
channel 2.
3.
Switch off ODU 1, disconnect all the cables, connected on the front panel of the
BB/modem unit 1, and extract the BB/modem unit 1.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
5-3
5 - MAINTENANCE

4.
Insert the spare BB/modem unit (with the ODU switch in position OFF) and
connect again all the cables, except the STM-1 cables.
5.
Switch on ODU 1, wait the on-line state of the BB/modem unit 1 and the completion
of the cable compensation procedure.
6.
Set again the switches to the AUTO mode.
7.
Move the cables (or the optical fibers) of the STM-1#1 signal (and of the STM-1#2
signal in case of 2xSTM-1 capacity) on the front panel of the BB/modem unit 1 and
then force immediately the Tributary switch on channel 1.
8.
Change the system type:
Should the current system type be 1+1 FD DTI, change to 1+1 FD STI
Should the current system type be 1+1 HSBY DTI, change to 1+1 HSBY STI.
The procedure does not protect the service channels.
BB/modem unit 2 in STI systems or BB/modem unit 1 and 2 in DTI systems

1.
Set the switch mode to MANUAL and set the Tributary switch to channel 1 (should
unit 2 be replaced) or to channel 2 (should unit 1 be replaced).
2.
Switch off the ODU, disconnect all the cables, connected on the front panel of the
BB/modem unit, and extract the BB/modem unit.
3.
Insert the spare BB/modem unit (with the ODU switch in position OFF) and
connect again all the cables.
4.
Switch on the ODU, wait the completion of the on-line and cable compensation
procedures.
5.
Set again the switches to the AUTO mode.
5.1.2.3.2 Controller unit

1.
Remove the front panel of the unit by unscrewing the 2 screws on the sides.
2.
Remove the faulty unit by using the two levers on the sides.
3.
Insert the spare Controller unit. The equipment configuration that has been
memorised on the KEY will be automatically entered on the new Controller unit.

5-4
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
5 - MAINTENANCE

5.1.2.3.3 Alarm Restitution Unit
The Alarm Restitution unit replacement must be carried out after a proper procedure
driven by a LCT command. In fact its bare removal causes the System switching off,
since the unit holds the power switch.
A bypass switch within the BB/Modem unit allows the powering of the whole equipment.
This switch is available in the BB/Modem unit with P/N 612-314/07 for the electrical
version and P/N 612-314/06 for the optical version. An FPGA register allows the
Controller to recognize if this feature is supported by the BB/Modem unit.
This feature is available starting from SVR 4.5. It provides an activation command to
force the bypass switch and an automatic switch off command 3 minutes later. This time
is long enough to replace the failed Alarm Restitution unit and avoids dangerous
overheating (fans are supplied only by Alarm Restitution unit).
Hardware details are shown in Fig. 5.4. An OptoMOS relay (normally open) placed in
the BB/Modem unit acts as an electronic switch: a command coming from the Controller
Unit causes the by-pass of the mechanical switch housed in the Alarm Restitution unit.
A current sensor makes the actual command status available to the FPGA for reporting
to the Controller.
Fig. 5.4
Alarm Restitution unit replacement management

Controller
Unit
BB/MODEM Unit
Alarm
Restitution
Unit
DC/DC
Tertiary
voltages
Converter
Power switch
Check and status
Command
DC/DC
12 V
New BB board
indicator
Replacement procedure:
1.
Connect the LCT to the equipment.
2.
To replace the Alarm Restitution Unit without the switching off of the radio system,
follow the procedure explained in the SRA 4 OMN Manual para. 6.7.1.6
(Maintenance).

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
5-5
5 - MAINTENANCE

5.1.2.3.4 Fans unit
Fig. 5.5
1.
Push up-side the switch on the front panel (in position OPEN).
2.
Remove the unit by using the handle on the front panel.
Flow chart No. 1 - Intervention procedure because of failure

5-6
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
5 - MAINTENANCE

5.2 LIST OF SPARE PARTS
The chosen maintenance philosophy anticipates substitution of an outdoor assembley
(ODU) or a failed unit (baseband section - IDU). Therefore all spares consist of outdoor
assembly and units that are equal to the ones used in the equipment itself.
In the baseband section, a spare unit substitutes the corresponding failed unit
completely.
5.2.1
Tab. 5.1
IDU spare parts list

List of spare parts - IDU
Denomination
SRA4 IDU
SRA4
IDU-STM1
5.2.2
P/N
BB-MODEM unit with electrical interface (32/128 TCM)

or
BB-MODEM unit with optical interface (32/128 TCM)
612-314/07
BB-MODEM unit with electrical interface (32/128 TCM)

or
BB-MODEM unit with optical interface (32/128 TCM)
612-314/65
612-314/06
612-314/64
Controller unit
634-001/02
614-104/66
Fan unit
614-041/17
Wired subrack
628-587/10
Cover
224-065/54
ODU spare parts list

Every ODU has been adjusted in factory at the RF channel frequency. Refer to
par. 2.2.7 to see the complete list of the available ODU .
5.2.2.1
AP ODU
Tab. 5.2
7 GHz
ODU P/N
735-201/07-xxx
Tab. 5.3
8 GHz
ODU P/N

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
5-7
5 - MAINTENANCE

Tab. 5.3
8 GHz
735-201/08-xxx
Tab. 5.4
10 GHz
ODU P/N
735-201/10-xxx
Tab. 5.5
11 GHz
ODU P/N
735-201/11-xxx
Tab. 5.6
13 GHz
ODU P/N
735-201/13-xxx
5.2.2.2
AP/CC ODU
Tab. 5.7
6 GHz (6L)
ODU P/N
735-211/06-xxx
Tab. 5.8
6 GHz (6U)
ODU P/N
735-211/06-xxx
Tab. 5.9
7 GHz
ODU P/N
735-211/07-xxx
Tab. 5.10
8 GHz
ODU P/N
735-211/08-xxx

5-8
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
5 - MAINTENANCE

Tab. 5.11
11 GHz
ODU P/N
735-211/11-xxx
Note - The ODUs can be used also as spare parts of the previous ODUs according to
the following table:
Tab. 5.12
ODU P/N
as Spare part also of the ODU
735-211/11-110
735-211/11-100
735-211/11-111
735-211/11-101
735-211/11-160
735-211/11-150
735-211/11-161
735-211/11-151
735-211/11-210
735-211/11-200
735-211/11-211
735-211/11-211
735-211/11-260
735-211/11-250
735-211/11-261
735-211/11-251
735-211/11-310
735-211/11-300
735-211/11-311
735-211/11-301
735-211/11-360
735-211/11-350
735-211/11-361
735-211/11-351
13 GHz
ODU P/N
735-211/13-xxx

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
5-9
5 - MAINTENANCE

5.3 PROCEDURE FOR SPARE PARTS USE
This paragraph illustrates the procedure to use when having to replace the faulty unit of
the IDU and the faulty ODU.
To simplify the description, the following procedures concern the disassembling of the
parts to replace. Obviously to place the spare part back proceed in the opposite manner.
5.3.1
Procedure for the IDU unit replacement

Refer to par. 5.1.2.3 "IDU unit replacement".
5.3.2
Procedure for the ODU replacement

To replace the ODU remove the ODU from the supporting framework fastened to the
mast.
The procedure to follow is specified below (refer to Fig. 5.6):
a)
Switch off the ODU by using the switch on the relevant BB/Modem unit (ODU PWR
OFF) in the IDU.
b)
Pull out the IF cable.
c)
Disconnect ground.
d)
Disconnect the RF waveguide.
e)
Loosen and remove the four bottom screws (S1-S4).

Lift the ODU, so as to free it from the hooks on the support, and remove it.

5-10
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
5 - MAINTENANCE

Fig. 5.6
ODU Disconnection
TOP VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
5-11
5 - MAINTENANCE
LA
PA
G
E

5-12
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
6 - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
6 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
6.1 ODU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
6.1.1
General description
The IF signals, coming/sent from/to the IDU, are properly treated in the IF subunit. Here
a primary lightning protection and the DC extraction are performed. A diplexer sends the
IF signals to the IF sections and the FSK subcarrier to the modem unit.
The power supply returns to the IF subunit the required voltages to be distributed to the
other utilizers.
The Rx IF (140 MHz), coming from the microwave receiver, is addressed to the IDU
while the Tx IF (350 MHz), coming from the IDU, is sent to the transceiver together a DC
voltage: the presence of the DC voltage enables the transmitter to operate at fixed gain
(AGC OFF).
The IF unit houses the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuits, a frequency reference
oscillator (TCXO) and a single chip microprocessor controller to manage the hardware
inside the ODU.
The dual VCO subunit provides a very low phase noise UHF signals to synchronize the
RF VCOs.
The transceiver interfaces the filter diplexer which insures the required decoupling
between transmitter and receiver modules.
The outdoor unit (ODU), shown in Fig. 6.1, is a cabinet containing:
the RF parts,
Microwave Diplexer Filter
Dual UHF VCO subunit
Microwave Transceiver Front-end (MWTF)
and a power supply distributor containig the outdoor side of a FSK modulated
communication channel for IDU-ODU signalling:
IF unit with FSK subunit
Power supply

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
6-1

Fig. 6.1
Outdoor unit
RF GROUP COMPOSITION
1) Power supply
2) IF unit
3) MWTF
4) Dual UHF VCO
5) Filter duplexer
(5)
(4)
RF
AMPLIFIER
RF
VCO
RF
RICEIVER
RF
VCO
SYNT
UHF
(3)
V
C
O
(1)
FSK
SUBUNIT
(2)
TCXO
+6.5V
+12V
+25V
350 MHz
140 MHz
-VB
IF CABLE

6-2
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006

6.1.2
Main characteristics
The ODU supports continous linear ATPC.
The ODU has the following external connections:
6.1.3
6.1.3.1
AGC voltage measurement on a BNC connector
IF Connection for IDU-ODU cable connection (connector type N)
Waveguide flange for connection to antenna
An RS-232 interface accessible from outside the ODU is provided for the
connection with a PC during tests, factory tuning and for Inventory (7C LEMO
Connector)
IF LO and RF LO connectors for the CC configuration.
Unit description
Power supply
Converts the DC voltage to the voltages required by other subunits, provides alarm for
failures, extracts the DC voltage from the cable and insures the primary lightning
protection.
The ODU must withstand holes in the Power Supply Voltage coming from IDU up to 6
msec.
A surge protector is also mounted on this unit to prevent any damage that can occur due
to lightning discharge (5KV protection according to I.E.C. 801-5).
6.1.3.2
IF unit
Is a transversal unit; it includes IF duplexer, dual IF processing, dual PLL circuit,
IDU/ODU communication channel, ODU hardware controller.
A triplexer addresses the IF and FSK signals respectively to the IF sections and the FSK
subcarriers toward the modem.
The Tx IF (350MHz) is up-converted to 1690MHz, filtered and sent to the transmitter;
the Rx IF, coming from the microwave receiver (2180MHz), is down-converted to
140MHz and sent to the IDU.
The IF unit houses also the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuit, a frequency
reference oscillator.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
6-3

6.1.3.2.1 FSK sub-unit
This subunit collects, manages and processes the informations (alarms, commands,
data channels) coming / going from / to the different units into the Radio Terminal Unit
in the IDU.
The communication between ODU and IDU is performed by FSK mo-demodulation of
two distinct carriers at 10 MHz (from ODU to IDU) and at 7 MHz (from IDU to ODU).
This unit has also the task to distribute the secondary voltages to all the units contained
in the ODU.
6.1.3.3
Microwave Transceiver Front-end subunit

The subunit is composed of a transmitter section and a receiver section.
The transmitter receives as input the 1690 MHz IF signal coming from the IF subunit and
up converts it into a radio frequency signal by means of TX local oscillator. The signal
is then amplified by the power section and transmitted to the microwave duplexer.
The receiver section receives from the antenna a radio frequency signal, amplifies by
means of a LNA and equalizes it, and then down converts it into a 2180 MHz IF signal
by means of RX local oscillator. The IF signal is amplified and then transmitted to the
IF subunit and then to the indoor unit (demodulator section).
The two Local Oscillators (one for the transmitter section and one for the receiver
section) are composed of two broadband VCOs phase locking to the UHF signal
incoming from the DUAL UHF VCO.
The Microwave Transceiver Front-end (MWTF) allows to translate a multilevel QAM
modulated signal from the intermediate frequency IF to the microwave field and vice
versa. MWTF operates in temperature range from -33 C to + 55 C.
A simplified block diagram of the unit is shown in Fig. 6.2. The unit consists of a
transmission up-converter (including the relevant phase lockable oscillator PLO), of a
receiver down converter (including the relevant PLO) and a dc section including ALC
driver telemetry/alarm and biasing circuits.
The transmitter section includes a variable gain IF preamplifier and filter, IF linearizer,
up-converter (which besides converting the IF signal must reject the Image and LO
signals), a power stage an output detector. and a wave-guide isolator.
The transmitter can support high complexity QAM modulation format.
The transmitter always operates in closed loop. The EEPROM (previously programmed)
suitable addressed, provides digital serial data to the IF PROCESSOR unit (an
equipment that interface the MWTF unit trough a multipin connector). The digital data
are analog converted inside the IF PROCESSOR and then returned to the microwave
transceiver. The analog voltage is the reference for the ALC driver (Which contains a
detector diode for temperature compensation) and supplied to the power control module
(variable gain amplifier or variable attenuator).
The receiver consists of a wave-guide isolator, an LNA, variable RF linear attenuator,
an image rejection filter, a down converter-mixer and an IF stage with adjustable gain.
The two PLOs (for the Tx and Rx sections) are implemented using the same circuit. A
broadband VCO is phase locked to the UHF input signal according to the circuit of
Fig. 6.2. Since the phase noise close to the carrier is determined by the UHF signal and
above all because the microwave module is not mechanical isolated, the PLL filter must
be dimensioned to have a cut-off frequency of about 10 MHz.
The unit includes also five digital potentiometer with internal memory in order to set all
the parameters necessary for the best working condition (Tx, Rx linearity, RF/IF receiver
nominal gain).

6-4
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
RF from
DUPLEXER
FILTER
J2
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
From DUAL
VHF VCO
t1 t2 t3
xN
DIGITIL
POTENTIOM.
(with internal
memory)
r1 r2
:M
VCO
Rx AGC
IF
1690 MHz
LIN
AM/AM
AM/PM
t2
t3
t1
PLL
To/From From DUAL

UNITA' IF VHF VCO
IF
2180 MHz
r2
:M
VCO
xN
UP
CONVERTER
DC SECTION
+5 V
+5 V
SQUELCH
+5 V
Det. Voltage
ALC
DRIVER
13dB PWR
reduction
Comp. Diode
voltage
Tx
AMPLIFIER
J3
RF to
DUPLEXER
FILTER
Fig. 6.2
PLL
r1
DOWN
CONVERTER

MWTF simplified block diagram
6-5

6.1.3.4
Dual UHF VCO subunit

The subunit is composed of two UHF VCOs: their frequencies are synthesized by means
of two indipendent synthesizers placed in the IF subunit. The frequencies of the VCOs
are used as reference frequencies for the Tx and Rx PLLs located in RF module.
Both the oscillators have a low phase noise active device in order to guarantee the
required noise specifications.
The relative resonant cavity is a coaxial dielectric resonator with such a Q factor in order
to achieve the required effective bandwidth varying the varactors voltage.
Then the VCO output signal is opportunely amplified.
With CC operations the two VCO subunits must be synchronized in Rx.
This synchronisation is established through 2 coaxial cables situated between the two
ODU's. Two synchronisms flow on the 2 cables, i.e., the first Rx conversion (from RF
frequency to 2180 MHz) and the second Rx conversion (from 2180MHz to 140 MHz).
With regard to CC operation, one of the two ODU's must be software-preset to Master
(generates synchronisms) and the other ODU operating as Slave (receives the
synchronisms from the ODU Master).
6.1.3.5
Microwave Duplexer filter

The Duplexer filter is composed of two band-pass microwave filters connecting the RF
module to the antenna: in this way it is possible to use the same antenna to transmit and
receive.
The Microwave Duplexer insures the tunability in a quarter of RF band.
6.1.3.6
Tx Alarm
A loss of the RF transmitted power is detected with an alarm relayed via the FSK
communication channel to the IDU.
6.1.3.7
ATPC option
In the equipment ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control) function is available.
ATPC is linear and continuos.

6-6
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006

6.2 IDU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The IDU consists of 4 types of units connected together via the backplane:
Fig. 6.3
Controller unit
par. 6.2.1
par. 6.2.2
Fan unit
par. 6.2.3
BB-Modem unit
par. 6.2.4
IDU Subrack
SRA4 IDU
CHACHB
Alarms
U
n.
IDU
Key
Q-lan E-Link
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
PS
IF
PS
IF + Modem + ODU Power supply
Power supply + Alarms

Fan
Controller
Tributary + Services + ODU Power supply

SRA4 IDU-STM1
Power supply + Alarms

Fan
Controller


SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
6-7

6.2.1
Controller unit
The function of the unit is of system controller and MCF. The unit configures the system
and controls the alarm system by managing the right transit and the transmission of the
payload and service streams. The following are also provided: the F Interface for the
LCT, the Q interface for the supervisory system and the 4 general alarm indicating LEDs
of the system.
6.2.2
Alarm Restitution Unit

The function of the unit is of restituting the system alarms managed by the Controller
unit and of making the remote-commands/remote controls of the remote station
available to the external source through a Sub-D connector fitted on the front panel. It
also manages the 2 fans present on the subrack and their failure. The switch used to
switch ON the equipment is fitted on the front panel together with a connector for the
insertion of the Memory Key.
6.2.3
Fan unit
Two fans are present on this unit, which constantly ventilate the IDU assembly.
6.2.4
BB-MODEM unit
The unit carries out the following operation:
6.2.4.1
STM-1 input/output interfacing and base band processing; this interface can either
be of the electric or of the optical type. Base band processing is of the RSA type
(Regenerator Section Adaptation); the MSA function
(Multiplex Section
Adaptation) is not implemented.
Drop/Insert of the 2 Mb/s stream as WS traffic (Way Side)

(not available in the BB-Modem units P/N 612-314/64-65).
Drop/Insert of the two 64 kbit/s housekeeping channels (G703 and V11).
Generation of a 350MHz IF modulated signal for the ODU transmitter.
Processing and demodulation of the 140MHz IF signal incoming from the ODU
receiver.
The IF IDU-ODU cable interface, suitable to power the ODU, suitable for IF Tx and
Rx connections, IDU-ODU alarms and housekeeping communications through the
FSK modulated sub-carriers.
BB Section
Refer to Fig. 6.4.
The CMI (G.703) coded input signal is amplified, converted from CMI to NRZ and
converted from serial to parallel.
The data is then transmitted to the T-RSOH drop block, which will carry out the following
RSOH terminating functions:

6-8
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
frame alignment through the searching of the A1 and A2 bytes of the STM-1 frame
data descrambling
calculation of the BIP-8 parity with the B1 received bytes
check of any other alarms contained in the SOH bytes (e.g., MS-AIS. MS-RDI)
D1, D2, D3 and D4-D12 transit transparently (they are not managed)
E1 transits transparently (it is not managed)
F1 is dropped if configured as 64 kbit/s AUX or transits transparently.
Therefore the signal is sent to the R-RSOH insert circuit in order to insert the new bytes
of the RSOH, including the 64 kbit/s signals or the 2 Mbit/s WST one. The tributary
switch will receive the cited signal or that coming from the other BB+MODEM unit
(should the tributary be protected) and make it transit.
On the Receive side the signal coming from the Modem section enters the Hitless switch
through one path, while on the other path enters the signal incoming from the second
BB+MODEM unit, i.e., in case of the 1+1 configuration.
Based on the alarms of the Modem section the Hitless switch extracts the best signal
and hitless switches (without errors).
At the output of the hitless switch are carried out operations on the RSOH bytes that are
complementary to those carried out on the transmission side. The signal is hence
parallel-to-serial converted and then CMI encoded ready to be forwarded to the output.
Note: With regard to the 1+0 configuration, the switches are fixed and allow the transit
of the signal coming from the unit proper.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
6-9

Fig. 6.4
Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: BB Section

From other MOD
AUX channels
TRIB
switch
STM-1
S2P
T-RSOH
drop
ATPC insert
R-RSOH
insert
P2S
To MOD
BYTE_OUT
S2P
STM-1
(*)
B1 regeneration,
Insertion of : J0,
WS, DCC-R
LOS, LOF, J0(TIM),

B1, PM, MS-AIS, MSRDI, DCC-R mng
Main / Prot
Clock 155
CPU
FSK processing
To MOD
16 MB SDRAM
2x4 MB FLASH
2 MB EEPROM
AUX channels
STM-1
CMI
P2S
T-RSOH
insert
SWITCH
hitless
R-RSOH
drop
BYTE_IN
ATPC drop
From its own local DEM

From prot DEM
STM-1
(*)
LOF, J0 (TIM), B1,

PM, DCC-R mng
8
Clock 155
(*) not available in the BB-Modem units P/N 612-314/64-65
6.2.4.2
Modem Section
6.2.4.2.1 Overview
The functions performed by the modulator and demodulator are here below set down:
the pulse formation is obtained through techniques of digital signal processing

(DSP). The BB filtering is realized by digital FIR (Finite Impulse Response) filters
and it implements a formation of raised cosine pulse with a suitable roll-off factor.
At modulator side, these devices have fully programmable coefficients while, at
demodulator side, the Rx filters have been designed with fixed coefficient structure.
The two post-modulation and post-demodulation filters are of analog and
anti-aliasing type.
As the number of modulation states increases, the radio systems become more
vulnerable to multipath fading.
The Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer (ATDE) represents a powerful solution which
shows a better performance vs. complexity ratio, together with a lower sensitivity
to timing phase.
High performances are assured by dinamic convergence, accomplished by means
of a modified minimum mean-square error (MMSE) algorithm exhibiting "blind"
converegence acquisition, combined with the recursive updating of tap
coefficients.

6-10
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
The TCM coding utilization for the error correction allows the spectral net
requested spectral efficiency is easily met by adopting a non-critical roll-off factor.
A 2 or 4-dimension trellis coding associated with an M-QAM crossed format has
been adopted as the more effective solution as far as the transmission efficacy is
concerned as well as of total performances.
A maximum likelihood decoding procedure applies to the received sequence of

2D/4D points by means of a Viterbi algorithm.
In case of 4D costellation as a preliminary step, the decoder detects the received
4D point; it divides it into a pair of 2D points and the closest point in each 4D subset
and its metrics ("Euclidean distance" between the two points) are evaluated on the
basis the 2D points and metric estimation.
The foregoing process can iteratively evaluate all the points in each
multidimensional subset. By means of the Viterbi decoder the most probable
transmitted sequence of subsets is then estimated.
The process implies a slight complexity increase but operates at half the speed
(considering two successive symbols at the same time).
The errors detected by the decoder allow two BER alarm thresholds to be provided
(FAST BER), to activate the Early Warning switching by means of the integrated
hitless protection system.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
6-11

6.2.4.2.2 Cross Polarization Interface Canceller (XPIC) (not available in the
BB-Modem units P/N 612-314/64-65)
The XPIC is automatically enabled in co-channel configuration.
Co-channel operation with high level modulation schemes requires very high
cross-polarization descrimination (XPD). Modern radio relay antennas meet the XPD
requirements at least under ideal propagation conditions; nevertheless
cross-polarization interference (XPI) between orthogonally arranged channels may
increase under particular conditions such as rainfall or multipath propagation.
As additional mean to counteract these phenomena, a powerful cross-polarization
interference canceller devices has been fit into the demodulator. Since the interference
effects are time variable, the XPIC device structure (shown in Fig. 6.5) is adaptive,
consisting also of transversal filter.
At transmit side, it is not requested neither the common use for the V and H channels of
a single L.O. nor the synchronization of the two used oscillators.
There is also no strict requirement for clock synchronization at transmit side.
At receive side, beside the exchange of the received data signals at IF level, the only
interconnection between vertical and horizontal channel is the L.O. synchronization of
the receivers and no additional clock synchronization of the demodulators is necessary.
Another advantage of this concept is the independence of the XPIC operation from the
lock-in state of the carrier recovery being the carrier frequencies of the interfering signal
and the compensation signal identical at the adder point. This greatly improves
performances after strong XPI events since the XPIC can first remove the XPI on the
main signal, thus facilitating the subsequent lock-in procedure.
Fig. 6.5
XPIC Concept

6-12
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006

6.2.4.2.3 Block diagram
Refer to Fig. 6.6.
The interface with the BB section is at byte level, the IF one is at 350 MHz on the uplink
and 140 MHz on the downlink. The modem implements a TCM encoding linked to a
Reed Solomon. A bit interleaver protects the pointer and reduces pointer slip. A byte
interleaver distributes the error burst generated by the TCM decoder in order to
guarantee and efficient linked code. Sampling is asynchronous both on the transmission
side and on the receive side and it always takes place at 200 MHz. This latter frequency
is obtained through a quartz-crystal oscillator. A variable interpolator matches the
symbol frequency to the sampling frequency. The transmission carrier is obtained from
another 350 MHz quartz-crystal oscillator. On the receive side instead, the 140 MHz IF
is directly sampled hence a direct modulation is obtained.
The two IF signals are combined through a splitter, which guarantees the required
isolation between the two paths. Over the same coaxial cable is established the
dialogue (alarm and control signal) between the Outdoor Section and the Indoor Section
through two further FSK modulated sub-carriers whose frequencies are respectively 10
MHz for the Outdoor signal and 7 MHz for the Indoor signal.
The Modem section also operates as a collector of the data to send to the Controller. In
fact, through the data bus the Controller receives the information concerning failures on
the outdoor unit (ODU) or on the cable interconnecting the ODU and Modem.
According to a software setting the modulation scheme can be 128 TCM-4D or

32 TCM-2D.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
6-13

Fig. 6.6
Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: MODEM Section
BYTE_IN
I
DAC
CK_IN
BYTE_OUT
BB
PROC
p/2
FSK
MODEM
CK_OUT
350 MHz
clock XO
offset
(from BB proc.)
PLL RX byte
(19.44 / 38.88)
IF 350 MHz (Tx)
7 MHz (Tx)
TRIP
10 MHz (Rx)
140 MHz (Rx)
peak
(from BB proc.)
ADC
IFX OUT
ADC
IFX IN
:2
200 MHz
clock XO
:1

6-14
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006

6.3 LED, MONITORING POINTS, CONNECTORS
AND SWITCHES
In this paragraph are reported the operations of all the control and command elements
that are present on the front panels of the units making up the equipment.
Fig. 6.7 illustrates the front panel of the indoor assembly showing the LEDs, the
monitoring points, the connectors and the control elements.
The list and the function of the LEDs are reported in Tab. 6.1.
In the N+1 configuration some connectors are not used. The not used connectors
are shown in Fig. 3.51.
Fig. 6.7
Front panel of the SRA4 IDU with electrically interfaced BB-MODEM unit
10
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU PWR
Key
I
Q-lan E-Link
13
12
U
S
E
R
STM-1 #1
In Out
ODU
ALM
STM-1 #2
In Out
CABLE
ALM
12
12
CO-CH
Exp. Port In
ODU PWR
I
O
IF
PS
Out
F
A
N
LCT
U
n.
WST
V11 G703
In Out
12
11
1 - Connector RJ45 for 64 kbit/s data channels :

(byte F1: int. V.11; byte S23: int. G.703) or (byte F1: int. G.703; byte S23: int. V.11)
(In N+1 configuration byte F1 is used only)
2 - Connector SubD-9 RS-232 for LCT links
3 - 1-0/2.3 coaxial connector for STM-1 traffic
4 - 1-0/2.3 coaxial connector for 2 Mbit/s WST traffic
5 - SMA connector for ODU connection
6 - ODU power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation)
7 - LED
8 - Connector for the KEY
9 - SubD-25 connector for in/out parallel alarms, remote control
10 - IDU general power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation)
11 - Bipolar connector for station battery
12 - Not used
13 - RJ45 connector for the Q supervisory interface

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
6-15

Fig. 6.8
Front panel of the SRA4 IDU with optically interfaced BB-MODEM unit
10
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU PWR
Key
I
Q-lan E-Link
13
U
S
E
R
STM-1 #1
Out In
ODU
ALM
STM-1 #2
Out In
CABLE
ALM
12
12
CO-CH
Exp. Port In
Out
ODU PWR
I
O
IF
PS
F
A
N
LCT
12
U
n.
WST
V11 G703
In Out
12
11

2 - SubD-9 RS-232 connector for LCT link
3 - Optical connector for STM-1 traffic
4 - 1-0/2.3 Coaxial connector for 2 Mbit/s WST traffic
7 - LED
11 - Bipolar connector for the station battery
12 - Not used
13 - RJ45 connector for the supervisory Q interface

6-16
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006

Fig. 6.9
Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with electrically interfaced BB-MODEM unit
7
12
11
10

3 - 1-0/2.3 coaxial connector for STM-1 traffic
6 - LED
11 - Not used

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
6-17

Fig. 6.10
Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with optically interfaced BB-MODEM unit
7
12
11
10

3 - Optical connector for STM-1 traffic
6 - LED
11 - Not used

6-18
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006

Tab. 6.1
Summary of the front panel LEDs

Unit
LED
Colour
Meaning
ODU
Alarm
Red
General ODU alarm: The alarm is dropped at

Base-Band level. It lights up when an alarm is
present on the ODU or the ODU is
disconnected.
CABLE
Alarm
Yellow CABLE alarm: lights up when current drain is

lower than expected. The causes might be
due to the cable either breaking down or being
disconnected, or to absence of ODU.
Red
BB+MODEM
Unit
(Note 3)
CABLE alarm: lights up when current drain is

higher than expected. The cause might be
due to a short-circuit on the cable or on the
ODU.
CH A
Green Channel 1 currently used; the unit is currently
(Note 1, 2)
operating by using channel 1 (Refer to
Fig. 6.11 and Fig. 6.12).
Yellow Channel 1 currently used by a software
forcing (Refer to Fig. 6.11 and Fig. 6.12).
CH B
Green Channel 2 currently used; the unit is currently
(Note 1, 2)
operating by using channel 2 (Refer to
Fig. 6.13 and Fig. 6.14).
Yellow Channel 2 currently used by a software
forcing (Refer to Fig. 6.13 and Fig. 6.14).
'
Red
General unit alarm: the LED is ON if the

battery cable is disconnected.
Green Power Supply Status: the LED is ON in case

of normal operating condition.
'
TEST
CONTROLLER
Unit
Red
General alarm inside the unit: Card Fail

alarm.
Yellow Unusual alarm: The LED lights up when the

equipment is not operating according to what
configured, but is "forced" into an unusual
condition.
CRITICAL/
MAJOR
Red
Critical/ Major alarm: If ON it denotes the

presence of a Critical/Major" alarm inside the
IDU, for which an immediate (Critical) or
urgent (Major) corrective action is required.
MINOR /
WARNING
Red
Minor/ Warning alarm: If ON it denotes the

presence of a "Minor/Warning" alarm inside
the IDU, for which a corrective action is not
urgently required.
Note 1: This LED displays the position of the Rx switch.

Note 2: In the N+1 configuration this LED is always OFF on the Standby BB-Modem
unit.
Note 3: In N+1 configuration on the BB-Modem units relevant to the protected channels
LED CH. A and CH. B have the following meaning:
CH.A ON, CH. B OFF: working channel
CH. A OFF, CH. B ON: channel on standby.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
6-19

Fig. 6.11
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
STM-1
electrical/optical
LED CH. A ON: block diagram without tributary protection
BB UNIT 1
Data Interface
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Tx1
L-RSOH
Switch
Tx
Modulator
Tx2
fixed
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
STM-1
electrical/optical
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
Switch
Rx
Ch.A
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
ODU
Demodulator
Ch.B
Data Interface
1+1
BASE BAND
INTERCONNECTION
BB UNIT 2
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Tx2
Tx1
L-RSOH
Switch
Tx
Modulator
fixed
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Switch
Rx
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Ch.B
ODU
Demodulator
Ch.A
not used

6-20
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006

Fig. 6.12
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
STM-1
electrical/optical
LED CH. A ON: block diagram with tributary protection (with SRA4 IDU only)
BB UNIT 1
Data Interface
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Tx1
L-RSOH
Switch
Tx
Modulator
Tx2
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Switch
Rx
STM-1
electrical/optical
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Ch.A
ODU
Demodulator
Ch.B
Data Interface
1+1
BASE BAND
INTERCONNECTION
BB UNIT 2
STM-1
electrical/optical
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Tx2
Tx1
L-RSOH
Switch
Tx
Modulator
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
STM-1
electrical/optical
Switch
Rx
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Ch.B
ODU
Demodulator
Ch.A

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
6-21

Fig. 6.13
64
64 kbit/s
kbit/s
V.11/G.703
V.11/G.703
STM-1
STM-1
electrical/optical
electrical/optical
LED CH. B ON: block diagram without tributary protection
BB UNIT 1
Data
Data Interface
Interface
SDH
SDH Interface
Interface
T-RSOH
Tx1
Tx2
L-RSOH
Switch
Tx
Modulator
Modulator
fixed
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
STM-1
STM-1
electrical/optical
64
64 kbit/s
kbit/s
V.11/G.703
V.11/G.703
Switch
Rx
Ch.A
SDH
SDH Interface
Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
ODU
Demodulator
Ch.B
Data
Data Interface
Interface
1+1
BASE BAND
INTERCONNECTION
BB UNIT 2
SDH
SDH Interface
Interface
T-RSOH
Tx2
Tx2
Tx1
Tx1
L-RSOH
Switch
Tx
Modulator
fixed
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Switch
Rx
SDH
SDH Interface
Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Ch.B
Ch.B
Ch.A
Ch.A
ODU
Demodulator
not used

6-22
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006

Fig. 6.14
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
STM-1
LED CH. B ON: block diagram with tributary protection (with SRA4 IDU only)
BB UNIT 1
Data Interface
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Tx1
L-RSOH
Switch
Tx
Modulator
Tx2
electrical/optical
fixed
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Switch
Rx
STM-1
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Demodulator
Ch.B
electrical/optical
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
Ch.A
ODU
Data Interface
1+1
BASE BAND
INTERCONNECTION
BB UNIT 2
STM-1
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Tx2
Tx1
L-RSOH
electrical/optical
Switch
Tx
Modulator
fixed
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Switch
Rx
STM-1
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
electrical/optical
L-RSOH
Ch.B
Ch.A
ODU
Demodulator
not used

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN
911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006
6-23
LA
PA
G
E

6-24
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU)
SDH Split Radio
User Manual (UMN)

911-381/02C0000
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB

ODU)
D.45
D.55
SDH Split Radio
Issue 7, March 2006
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB

ODU)
SDH Split Radio
User Manual (UMN)

911-381/02C0000
User Manual (UMN)
Issue 7, March 2006
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB

ODU)
SDH Split Radio
911-381/02C0000
D.25
Issue 7, March 2006
User Manual (UMN)

911-381/02C0000
Issue 7, March 2006
D.30
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU)

SDH Split Radio
SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU)

SDH Split Radio
User Manual (UMN)
911-381/02C0000
Issue 7, March 2006
D.20
User Manual (UMN)

911-381/02C0000
Issue 7, March 2006
PRINTED in ITALY

Siemens Sra4 SDH Split Radio - For Set

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Siemens Sra4 SDH Split Radio - For Set

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

Copyright (C) Siemens S.p.A. 2006

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

Issue 7, March 2006

Issue 6, January 2006

In Issue 7, March 2006, as to the previous Issue 6, January 2006:

The SRA4 IDU-STM1 has been added;

the 11 GHz ODU extension P/N have been updated;

the Optical Safety has been modified.

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1

SAFETY RULES AND USE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7

GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

ODU AP/CC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93

INSTALLATION OF THE RACK ETSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

INTERNAL CONNECTIONS ( for SRA4 IDU only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IDU/ODU CONNECTION WITH BRAIDED OR 1/4 COAXIAL CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.87

LIST AND USE OF ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS AND ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8

TROUBLESHOOTIN614-041/17G AND RESTORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1

LIST OF SPARE PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7

PROCEDURE FOR SPARE PARTS USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1

ODU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IDU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7

LED, MONITORING POINTS, CONNECTORS AND SWITCHES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

SRA 4 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

Pressurization with external dehydrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY